Sunteți pe pagina 1din 287

E008626 & E008791

Maple Crete

Part 1 of 2

Purchased From Tallman Truck Center


Date October, 2016
Model DLA
Serial Number E008626 & E008791

Record the Model and Serial Number of equipment for parts ordering information

www.vikingcives.com

E08626-M & E08791-M


M00000

E08626-M & E08791-M


Table of Contents

DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.


***LIMITED WARRANTY*** iii
IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT iv
ORDERING PARTS v
WARRANTY REQUEST PROCEDURE vi
INTRODUCTION vii
SAFETY vii
DEFINITION OF SAFETY TERMS AND SYMBOLS viii
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ix
LOCKOUT PROCEDURE ix
DAILY INSPECTION AND LUBRICATION x
GENERAL OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS xi

FRONT BUMPER 11" EXTENSION ASSEMBLY 1

METRO 275 OIL TANK ASSEMBLY 3


MOUNTING KIT FOR 275 OIL TANK WELDMENT - NO WING 6
CHANNEL ADAPTER 350SCL BOSCH VALVE 7
SCL JUNCTION BOX MOUNTING BRACKET 8
BEACON STAND WELDMENT ROUND 60" 9

CAB CONTROLS 11
CAB CONSOLE AUX LIGHTING 9 SWITCH 12
PEDESTAL ASSEMBLY 9 SWITCH BOX MOUNTING 17

DIRECT LIQUID APPLICATION UNIT 21


DLA 2600 GAL ASSEMBLY FRAME MOUNT 31
DLA FRAME MOUNTED INSTALL 42
DLA LIQUID PLUMBING KIT ASSEMBLY 43
PUMP ANTI ICE HYPRO 9303C-HM1C-U 62
DLA SPRAY BAR ASSEMBLY 1 1/2 FIXED WIDE MOUNT 63
DLA RUBBER FLAP MOUNTING ASSEMBLY FRAME MOUNT 68
FRAME MNT ALUMINUM FENDER KIT 54 69

E08626-M & E08791-M i


MTO SIGN KIT DLA FRM MNT ASS'Y 73
MTO CONSPICUITY SIGN PANEL - ANTI-ICING 87

ELECTRICAL 89
ELECTRICAL LAYOUT 91
BETTS SEALED JUNCTION BOX 93
HARNESS KIT CAB POWER FEED 94

HYDRAULICS 97
HYDRAULICS LAYOUT 99
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK WELDMENT 350SCL 100
PUMP KIT METARIS SINGLE (MHP20A) 101
RETURN MANIFOLD BLOCK 104
STAINLESS HOSE HANGER KIT 120 LG 105
1" HIGH PRESSURE FILTER KIT 108

APPENDIX A - METARIS GEAR PUMP 111


APPENDIX B - HYPRO 9303 125
APPENDIX C - BOSCH REXROTH 151

NOTES 271

E08626-M & E08791-M ii


VIKING-CIVES LTD. (CANADA)
MOUNT FOREST, ONTARIO
TELEPHONE (519) 323-4433

E08626-M & E08791-M


***LIMITED WARRANTY***

VIKING-CIVES LTD. (Canada) warrants products of its manufacture against defects in workmanship and material for a
period of one year from date of shipment to customer; and in consequence of this warranty, any component part or parts of such
products proving defective within the above specified time will be repaired or replaced F.O.B. factory, providing such parts are
returned, transportation prepaid, to the factory and found defective by VIKING-CIVES LTD. (Canada). This warranty will
not apply to any product, which have been repaired or altered outside of the VIKING-CIVES LTD. (Canada) factory in any
way so as, in VIKING-CIVES LTD. (Canada) sole judgment, to affect its stability or reliability, nor which has been subjected

iii
to misuse, negligence or accident.

The obligations of VIKING-CIVES LTD. (Canada) under this limited warranty are limited to the replacement of defective
parts as set forth above; such obligations are exclusive and in lieu of all other remedies, warranties, guarantees or liabilities,
express or implied, with respect to each product delivered hereunder, arising by law or otherwise (including without limitation
any obligation or liability of VIKING-CIVES LTD. (Canada), arising from negligence or with respect to fitness for a
particular purpose, merchantability, loss or use, revenue, or profit, or any incidental, indirect, special or consequential damages
or injuries, even if VIKING-CIVES LTD. (Canada) has been advised of the possibility of such damages or injuries; and all
other remedies, warranties, guarantees, or liabilities are hereby expressly excluded and disclaimed. This limited warranty shall
not be extended, altered, or varied except by a written instrument signed by VIKING-CIVES LTD. (Canada).

VIKING-CIVES LTD. (Canada) assumes no responsibility for engines, electrical equipment, or any other
equipment and accessories not manufactured by VIKING-CIVES LTD. (Canada).
Identification of Equipment
Each specific unit is identified by a unique E-Job Number (E00XXXX). To ensure accurate service, your
Viking-Cives representative will need this E-Job Number whenever parts and/or service is required.

The E-Job Numbers will be in the following format:


Date of Manufacture Date of Manufacture
(prior to 2002) (after 2002)
e.g. 99-000 (1999) e.g. E 00001
e.g. 20-000 (2000)
e.g. 21-000 (2001)

All units assembled at Viking-Cives Ltd., Mt Forest, ON will have a National Safety Mark label inside the driv-
er’s door. The E-Job Number will be printed on this label, as shown below:

E-JOB Number
MARCH2016 E08456

e.g. MARCH2016 E08456

NOTICE: The E-Job Number is the most important identifier for any specific plow. It allows the Viking-Cives
parts and service team to access complete information for the specific project. For the fastest possible
service, always have the E-Job Number ready when making inquiries.

In order to provide more accurate service, you may also be asked to provide your individual equipment Model
and Serial No. The information required to identify the equipment may be found on the serial number tag
secured to the equipment.

500HD

XXXXXXX

M00000

E08626-M & E08791-M iv


Ordering Parts
When calling or emailing for parts and service, be sure to have the following information ready. This will allow
our parts and service personnel to quickly access your vehicle’s engineering information and specifications:

Company Name E-Job Number


Address Model Number
Postal/ZIP Code Serial Number

When placing orders, be sure to include the following information, printed/typed clearly:

Part numbers and descriptions Specific shipping instructions


Quantities required

For the fastest service, place orders with your nearest dealer.

Dealer
Address

Phone
Toll Free
Fax

VIKING-CIVES LTD. VIKING-CIVES of


parts@viking-cives.ca WESTERN NEW YORK
Mount Forest, On, Batavia, NY 14020
Canada N0G 2L0 Ph. (585) 344-7122
Ph. (519) 323-4433 Fax (585) 344-7157
Fax (519) 323-4608

VIKING-CIVES (USA) VIKING-CIVES MIDWEST INC.


Harrisville, NY, 13648 Morley, MO, 63767
Ph. (315) 543-2321 Ph. (573) 262-3545
Fax (315) 543-2366 Fax (573) 262-3369

3/24/2016

E08626-M & E08791-M v


Warranty Request Procedure
To obtain warranty consideration, VIKING-CIVES LTD must be provided with the required information including:

E-Job Number Individual Model


Date of Manufacture Serial Numbers

To Obtain Parts Warranty Consideration


1. Contact Viking-Cives Ltd. customer service to obtain a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number.
NOTE: Any product arriving at Viking-Cives Ltd. without an RMA number will be rejected and returned to
the sender at the sender’s expense.
Goods are to be shipped prepaid to Viking-Cives Ltd., Mount Forest, Ontario, Canada. All items should
be clearly marked with the appropriate RMA number.
NOTE: When a replacement item is supplied prior to return of the defective part for warranty consideration
the following additional steps will occur:
a. An invoice will be generated for the value of the replacement item(s).
b. The defective part(s) must be returned prepaid to Viking-Cives Ltd.
2. Upon receiving the defective part(s), Viking-Cives Ltd. will evaluate the defective part(s). Once the evalua-
tion report is complete and the parts are deemed warranty, a credit will be issued against the outstanding
invoice. If the part(s) are deemed Non-warranty, the invoice will remain outstanding to be paid to
Viking-Cives Ltd. Any part(s) to be returned to the customer will be at the customer’s expense.

To Obtain Parts & Labour Repair Warranty Consideration


All repairs considered for warranty that are performed outside of Viking-Cives Ltd. require prior written autho-
rization from Viking-Cives Ltd. Failure to obtain written warranty authorization prior to repairs may result in the
rejection of the warranty claim.
NOTE: Viking-Cives Ltd. will apply warranty labour rates unless specifically determined otherwise.

1. Contact your Viking-Cives Ltd. Customer Service Department to obtain approval to proceed, and the
necessary paperwork.
2. Mail, email, or fax the completed form to Viking-Cives Ltd., attention: Customer Service Department.
3. Once the work order has been reviewed, warranty authorization will be granted or denied. Any part(s)
involved will follow the Parts Warranty Consideration procedures.
NOTE: Viking-Cives Ltd. E-Job Number must be provided in order to proceed, the E-Job number must be
on all paperwork sent to Viking-Cives.com

M00000

E08626-M & E08791-M vi


Introduction
The purpose of this manual is to assist in assembling, mounting, operating, and maintaining your new
Viking-Cives Snow & Ice Control Equipment. This manual has been prepared to familiarize operators and
service technicians with the design features of the equipment and proper installation, as well as, to instruct on
proper operation and maintenance.

All illustrations contained within this manual are accurate at the time of printing, however, due to changes and
improvements in our design and manufacturing processes, the actual equipment may vary slightly in detail.
Viking-Cives reserves the right to redesign or make changes to existing products without notification to the end
user.

Throughout this manual, references will be made to the following terms:

Prime Mover: The chassis or vehicle to which this product is attached.


Right side, curbside, RTH: Directions as determined in relation to the operator when seated in normal
Left side, driver side, LTH:  driving position.
IMPORTANT: Precautions that must be followed to prevent damage to the equipment.
NOTICE: Precautions that must be followed to prevent substandard performance.

Safety
DANGER: It is the responsibility of the OWNER & ALL OPERATORS to ensure that all per-
sons operating, or performing maintenance on this equipment have read and fully under-
stand the contents of this manual. Failure to follow the instructions outlined in this manual
may result in serious injury or death.

Key Safety Reminders


The equipment described in this manual is normally being operated in adverse winter conditions with bad
weather, snow and ice. Due to these poor operating conditions it is important that YOU, the operator, use good
safety practices at all times to protect yourself, co-workers and others when using the equipment.

Remember at all times that as the operator YOU are responsible for the safe operation of this equipment and
responsible for the safety of others. Good safety practices not only protect you, but also protect the people
around you.
Whenever there is doubt in regards to operator/bystander safety, always look to:
• Your employer’s safety programs and • The safety procedures outlined in this manual.
regulations. • The safety decals placed on the equipment.
• Local, state/provincial, and federal laws, rules • Your own good judgement.
and regulations.
3/24/2016

E08626-M & E08791-M vii


Definition of Safety Terms and Symbols
Safety Alert Symbol
The safety alert symbol is meant to grab the attention of the user in order to clearly identify critical safety infor-
mation. The safety alert symbol will always be accompanied by text or images to provide further information on
the specific hazard.

Whenever you see the safety alert symbol, BE ALERT, PAY ATTENTION! Always read and unserstand the
accompanying text and images. Wherever you see the safety alert symbol, YOUR safety is involved.

Key Safety Terms


All safety information will be labeled under the following four terms that describe the level of danger:

CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, MAY result in minor
or moderate injury.
WARNING: Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not avoided, COULD result in
serious injury or death.
DANGER: Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not avoided, WILL result in
serious injury or death.
NOTICE: Identifies tips, helpful hints, and maintenance information the owner/operator should
know. May be used to alert against unsafe practices that may result in non-personal injury or
damage.

M00000

E08626-M & E08791-M viii


Safety Instructions
Before attempting any type of assembly, operation, maintenance, or other work on or near this product:
READ AND COMPLETELY UNDERSTAND THIS MANUAL.
READ AND COMPLETELY UNDERSTAND THE MANUALS PROVIDED WITH YOUR PRIME MOVER/
VEHICLE.
Read and understand all safety signs on this product and on your prime mover/vehicle.
Know all your controls and know how to quickly stop all equipment or vehicle movement in case of an
emergency.
Know and follow good work practices when assembling, mounting, maintaining, repairing, removing, and
storing this product.
Never allow anyone, except the operator, to be around the prime mover or this product when either is in
motion.
Do not start-up unless others are clear of the work area.
Do not stand or climb on this product.
All decals must be kept clean and complete. Replace any decals that are unreadable.

Lockout Procedure
Before leaving the operator’s position or beginning any type of work on this product:
1. Lower all attachments to the ground.
2. Apply the prime mover’s parking brake, stop the engine and remove the starter key.
3. Wait for all moving parts to stop.
4. With the engine off, relieve all pressure in the hydraulic system by moving hydraulic levers in both
directions.

WARNING: After following the lockout procedures, pneumatic pressure may still be present in
the system. Residual pressure can be relieved by pumping the brakes after the vehicle is shut
off or by opening the release valve located on the prime mover’s air tank. As air pressure is
relieved, component motion may occur. Exercise extreme caution when servicing pneumatic
systems.

DANGER: Springs may be present throughout the equipment, including the brake chambers
used in the design of the Pro-Line tailgate locks. Springs under pre-load pressure may not
be secured by following Lockout Procedures. Viking-Cives Ltd does not recommend or
encourage tampering with and/or servicing spring loaded mechanisms without compre-
hensive training. Mishandling WILL result in severe injury.

3/24/2016

E08626-M & E08791-M ix


Daily Inspection & Lubrication
Daily inspection along with periodic preventive maintenance will reduce the chance of any major repairs
and down time during equipment use. Before any plow is attached to the vehicle, all equipment should be
inspected and checked to ensure that everything is in safe operating condition. Any and all defects, when
noted, should be scheduled for repair or immediate replacement.

The following checklist should be performed before and after each plowing shift to ensure operational
readiness.
NOTE: For more specific information and maintenance instructions, refer to the individual equipment sections
in this manual.

Check the fluid level in the hydraulic oil reservoir. If the sight gauge indicates low oil level, add the
appropriate amount of the specified hydraulic fluid.
Grease all required components:
• All plow harness sheave nipples.
• All hydraulic pump drive shaft nipples.
• Front and rear tower sheaves and swivel blocks.
• Wing extension arm nipples.
• Front and rear tower guide tracks.
• All front harness pivot points.
Check all components for loose and/or missing fasteners. Tighten and/or replace as necessary.
Visually inspect all hydraulic connections and hoses for cracks and/or leaks.
Check all cables, chains and sheaves for excessive wear or damage.
Visually inspect all caution and warning decals. All decals should be complete and legible. If cleaning the
decals does not make them legible, install new decals.
Visually inspect plow and wing units. Check cutting edges and shoes for signs of excessive wear and
replace as necessary. Some cutting edges may be rotated or “flipped over” to use the opposite side edge.
NOTE: Do not allow cutting edge to wear down to mounting angle. Any wear to the mounting angle may affect the
operation and safety of the equipment.

M00000

E08626-M & E08791-M x


General Operating Instructions
1. The operator should familiarize themselves with all equipment prior to operation. The cab controls are
placed at a comfortable reach of the operator, with an allowable amount of adjustment. If necessary, the
controls can be adjusted for either driver or passenger use.
2. The in-cab control levers are clearly marked as to the equipment/function they control.
3. To raise the plow or wing, pull back on the appropriate control lever, to lower the plow or wing, push the
control lever forward.
NOTE: The in cab controls are proportional to the hydraulic valve, therefore the further the control lever is
moved the faster the plow or wing will raise or lower.
4. Listen for any unusual sounds which may indicate worn or damaged parts. Repair and/or replace as
necessary.

3/24/2016

E08626-M & E08791-M xi


This Page Left Blank

E08626-M & E08791-M xii


01902966: FRT BUMPER 11" EXTENSION ASS'Y - INT'L
ITEM ID ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY REQ
1 01902967 FRNT BUMPER EXTENSION BRK'T - INT'L 2015 2
2 HW14D-10 FLATWASHER HARDENED 5/8 ZINC 8
3 HW36D-10 NUT HEX ELASTIC 5/8 UNC ZINC 4
4 HW40A-1020 BOLT HEX 5/8 X 2 1/2 UNC ZINC 4

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01902966.idw Rev.1


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 1 of 273
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK

01901288-M 1/8/2014

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 2 of 273


01001554
REAR METRO STANDOFF OIL TANK
ASSEMBLY

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01001554.idw Rev.3


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 3 of 273
01001554: REAR METRO STANDOFF OIL TANK ASSEMBLY
ITEM ID ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY REQ
1 01001555 HYD OIL TANK WELD'T 275 BOLT ON 1
2 01900488 DIVIDER VALVE BRK'T 1
3 0560061 FILTER ASSEMBLY RETURN IN-TANK SAE 1
4 HW14A-06 FLATWASHER SAE 3/8 ZINC 5
5 HW14C-06 LOCKWASHER SPLIT 3/8 ZINC 3
6 HW14D-08 FLATWASHER HARDENED 1/2 ZINC 18
7 HW36D-06 NUT HEX ELASTIC 3/8 UNC ZINC 2
8 HW36D-08 NUT HEX ELASTIC 1/2 UNC ZINC 9
9 HW40A-0606 BOLT HEX 3/8 X 3/4 UNC ZINC 3
10 HW40A-0816 BOLT HEX 1/2 X 2 UNC ZINC 5
11 HW40A-0820 BOLT HEX 1/2 X 2 1/2 UNC ZINC 4
12 HW40C-0608 BOLT CARRIAGE 3/8 X 1 UNC ZINC 2

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01001554.idw Rev.3


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 4 of 273
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

E08626-M & E08791-M


4 5 9
1

8 6 10

10 6 8

Page 5 of 273
11 6 6 8

REFERENCE ONLY

12

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01001554.idw


EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.
TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

Rev.3
01903259: MOUNTING KIT FOR 275 OIL TANK WELDMENT - NO WING
ITEM ID ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY REQ
1 01001300 REAR MAST LOWER MTG ANGLE 1
2 01901613 MOUNTING BRKT PS BOC OIL TANK WELDT 1
3 01903260 MOUNTING BRKT DS BOC OIL TANK 275 WELDT 1
4 HW14D-08 FLATWASHER HARDENED 1/2 ZINC 6
5 HW14D-10 FLATWASHER HARDENED 5/8 ZINC 14
6 HW36D-08 NUT HEX ELASTIC 1/2 UNC ZINC 3
7 HW36D-10 NUT HEX ELASTIC 5/8 UNC ZINC 7
8 HW40A-0820 BOLT HEX 1/2 X 2 1/2 UNC ZINC 3
9 HW40A-1020 BOLT HEX 5/8 X 2 1/2 UNC ZINC 7

6 4 4 8

2
1

9 5 5 7

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903259.idw


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 6 of 273
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

E08626-M & E08791-M


01901451

BOSCH M4 VALVE ENCLOSURE

BOSCH 266543 BRACKET

Page 7 of 273
BOSCH 266545 BRACKET

CHANNEL ADAPTER 350SCL BOSCH VALVE

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01901451.idw


01901451
EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.
TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.
01900467
SCL JUNCTION BOX MOUNTING
BRACKET

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01900467.idw Rev.2


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 8 of 273
01902042
BEACON LIGHT STAND WELDMENT
ROUND 60"

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01902042.idw


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 9 of 273
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK

01901288-M 1/8/2014

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 10 of 273


CAB CONTROLS

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 11 of 273


0660257
CAB CONSOLE AUX LIGHTING 9 SWITCH

ITEM ID ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION QTY REQ


1 0660369 SWITCH 2 POS ON-OFF FOR 0660257 6
2 0660370 SWITCH 3 POS ON-OFF-ON FOR 0660257 3
3 0660371 CIRCUIT BREAKER 10 AMP FOR 0660257 11
4 0660374 CIRCUIT BREAKER 15 AMP FOR 0660257 1
5 0660439 CIRCUIT BREAKER 5 AMP FOR 0660257 1

2 3

BACK OF 9 SWITCH CONSOLE

| |
IGNITION 12 VOLTS

1 - PIN 6 - SOCKET
2 - PIN 8 - SOCKET 5 4
NOTE: SEE WIRING HARNESS FOR CONNECTOR WIRE GUIDE
THIS OWNER'S MANUAL FILE IS CONTAINED WITHIN 0660257.idw, REV 3
E08626-M & E08791-M Page 12 of 273
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

E08626-M & E08791-M


WIRING HARNESS

Page 13 of 273
This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 0660257.idw
EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL
TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT AND DEVELOPMENT IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

SWITCH BOX

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT AND DEVELOPMENT IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 14 of 273 This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 0660257.idw
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

SCHEMATIC

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT AND DEVELOPMENT IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 15 of 273 This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 0660257.idw
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK

01901288-M 1/8/2014

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 16 of 273


00202152
PEDESTAL ASSEMBLY 9 SWITCH BOX
MOUNTING

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 00202152.idw


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 17 of 273
00202152

PEDESTAL ASSEMBLY 9 SWITCH BOX MOUNTING

ITEM ID ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION QTY REQ


1 00202030 PEDESTAL BASE WELD'T 18 3/4 IN 1
2 00202031 PEDESTAL ARM WELD'T - 9.250 OFFSET 1
3 00202149 9 SWITCH BOX PEDESTAL MOUNTING WELD'T 1
4 01900010 AIR CONTROL BRACE 1
5 0620030 KNOB PLASTIC 3/8-16 THREAD X 1 LG 2
6 HH-00237-006 MUFFLER CLAMP 3 IN 1
7 HW14A-04 FLATWASHER SAE 1/4 ZINC 2
8 HW14C-04 LOCKWASHER SPLIT 1/4 ZINC 2
9 HW40A-0406 BOLT HEX 1/4 X 3/4 UNC ZINC 2

00202152-M 4/8/2014

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 18 of 273


BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

E08626-M & E08791-M


3

9 8 7

Page 19 of 273
5
4

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 00202152.idw


EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.
TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK

00202152-M 4/8/2014

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 20 of 273


OWNER'S MANUAL
DIRECT LIQUID APPLICATION UNIT

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903177.idw


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 21 of 273
DIRECT LIQUID APPLICATION (DLA) ATTACHMENT INSTALLATION
SAFETY FIRST!! READ AND UNDERSTAND THE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE
PROCEEDING WITH ANY INSTALLATION.
Note : these installation instructions are intended as a guide to aid in the attachment of your Viking- Cives Frame Mounted or Roller
Pro DLA Attachment.

PRELIMINARY WARNINGS AND NOTICES

WARNING! When the hydraulics or the anti-icing liquid are under pressure – STAND CLEAR!

WARNING! The driver of the truck must understand the behaviour of towing liquid tanks. The water
moving around in the tank may cause truck stability and braking issues. The behaviour of the truck will
change as the level of liquid in the tank changes.

Note : this attachment may only be loaded or unloaded at a maximum of half the capacity of the tank; otherwise, the tank will fracture
causing equipment damage. There is a decal located at the pull hook as a reminder of this.

Note : there is a rear bumper mounted rubber flap that should be mounted prior to use of the DLA Attachment. Its intended function is
to protect the truck from spray of anti-icing/de-icing solutions, and also to reduce the effect of the wind on the spray stream/pattern.

ROLLER PRO DLA SPECIFIC OPERATION


For loading and unloading of the DLA attachment, follow the instructions provided in the Roller Pro Transfer System Manual.

The following steps and considerations must be taken prior to loading, operation, and unloading.

Prior to Loading

 The spray bar must be flipped up and pinned


 All electrical cables, hydraulic hoses, and air lines must be secured to the tipping frame

Prior to Operation

 The spray bar must be flipped down and pinned


 All necessary electrical cables, hydraulic hoses, and air lines must be connected to their respective location

Prior to Unloading

 The spray bar must be flipped up and pinned


 All necessary electrical cables, hydraulic hoses, and air lines must be disconnected and secured to the tipping frame
 End caps should be put on the electrical cables, hydraulic hoses, etc. to prevent contamination.

03706201-M 5/31/2016

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 22 of 273


General Notes
The DLA Attachment must be placed on a firm, level surface (such as a concrete garage floor or paved area) that is large enough to
safely accommodate this product.

Store the hoses and quick disconnect couplings in the tipping frame storage plate so that they are not resting on the ground and are out
of the way to prevent damage.

Be sure to cap all hose ends to prevent damage to the quick disconnect hose ends and prevent the introduction of foreign materials into
the hydraulic system.

Note : if equipped with a Force America 6100 CANBUS control system there will be an electrical connection at the pintle plate of the
chassis. Be sure to disconnect this cable prior to unloading.

PRE-OPERATION TESTING & CHECKS


With prime mover running, test all functions to ensure proper operation prior to taking the unit out on the roadways. Test and
check the following list after the DLA Attachment is connected properly to the prime mover frame or Roller Pro Tipping Frame.

1. All lights on the DLA Attachment are in working condition and meet regulatory standards.
2. The manual, electric and air ball valves all turn on and off.
3. The hydraulic pump and plumbing system operate as expected. While testing, check that the spray nozzles are aimed for the
desired spray pattern by running the spreader control in manual unload. Be sure to unload in an environmentally safe manner.
4. You must have liquid in the tank and follow operating instructions listed under the DLA ATTACHMENT OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS in this manual. If the pump does not sound right, it may be drawing air. See the AIR BLEEDING
PROCEDURE in this section.

DLA ATTACHMENT OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS


SAFETY FIRST!! READ AND UNDERSTAND THE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE
PROCEEDING WITH ANY SET-UP AND/OR OPERATION.

When all conditions of installation and setup have been met, the DLA Attachment is ready to operate. The switches for controlling the
DLA Attachment pump functions are located in the cab of the prime mover.

WARNING! When the hydraulics or the anti-icing liquid are under pressure – STAND CLEAR!

GENERAL OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS


1. The operator should become familiar with all equipment prior to operation. The cab controls are placed within a comfortable
reach of the operator, with an allowable amount of adjustment. If necessary, the controls can usually be adjusted for either
driver or passenger use.
2. The in-cab controls should be clearly marked as to the equipment/function they control.
3. To operate the anti-icing functions of the attachment, the operator should become familiar with the particular spreader control
functions of the prime mover.
4. When operating this equipment, listen for any unusual sounds which may indicate improper use or worn/damaged parts.
Repair or replace as necessary.

03706201-M 5/31/2016

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 23 of 273


DLA ATTACHMENT OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING! Be aware of traffic and pedestrians when spraying, especially when using the side booms!
Prior to roadway operation, ensure the pre-operation testing and checks have been completed as listed in PRE-OPERATION
TESTING & CHECKS part of this section.

Refer to the liquid plumbing schematic at the end of this instructional section for assistance with the following instructions.

1. Check that the electric ball valves - Valve F, Valve G, and Valve H are closed. There are indicators on top of the ball valve
manifold. They can be turned to the OFF position using the controls in the cab of the prime mover.
2. Ensure that Valve A, Valve D, and if equipped, Valve I, Valve J, Valve K are turned off.
3. Turn Valve B and Valve C to the RUN position.
4. Open Valve A, and visually check for any leaks. The unit can now be controlled from the cab of the prime mover.
5. Once in the cab, select your rates on the spreader control. Refer to your spreader control manual for more information.
6. Open the safety shut off, Valve E, with the air switch in the cab of the prime mover.
7. Select the booms that you are going to initially spray with. This will open a combination of Valve F, Valve G and Valve H
based on your selection.
8. Engage the spreader control.
9. You can now begin spraying on the roadway. Note : the unit may not start spraying until it reaches a predetermined ground
speed based on your spreader control settings.
10. You may turn booms on and off as you drive, but depending on the spreader control system on your prime mover, you may or
may not have to adjust your spreading rates.
11. Each boom is controlled by its own electric ball valve.

03706201-M 5/31/2016

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 24 of 273


When parking the DLA Attachment after use, follow the listed steps.

1. Turn off all boom electric ball valves - Valve F, Valve G and Valve H in the cab of the prime mover.
2. Close the safety shut off air (pneumatic) ball valve - Valve E in the cab of the prime mover
3. Ensure Valve B and Valve C are in the RUN position.
4. Ensure that Valve I, Valve J, and Valve K are closed.
5. Ensure that electrical ball valves -Valve F, Valve G and Valve H are physically closed. The dials on the top of the electric
ball valve indicate their position.
6. Visually check for leaks.

CAUTION! Be aware of conditions where the liquid in the attachment may freeze. This can cause
damage to the plumbing components. If freezing conditions are expected, take the appropriate
precautions to avoid freezing or drain the system completely.

FILL PROCEDURE
1. With Valve C in the PURGE position ,Valve A in ON position, and Valve B in the RUN position, remove the camlock plug
at Valve B and connect a hose with a 2" camlock male connector from your fill station.
2. With the filling hose securely connected, turn Valve B to the FILL position.
3. Begin pumping liquid from the fill station at a maximum rate of 225 GPM. Visually inspect for leaks. Note: The tank vent
has a maximum rate of 450 GPM for intermittent flow only.
4. Continue filling until the desired level has been reached in tank. Note: The tank has volume marked in gallons to assist with
filling.
5. Turn off the filling station and turn Valve B to the RUN position.
6. Disconnect the filling hose and replace the camlock plug into the female camlock connector. Note: Be aware that some liquid
may initially leak from the filling hose and the trailer plumbing when disconnecting the fill hose.

UNLOAD PROCEDURE
The Viking-Cives DLA Attachment has been designed and built to provide more function during the off season. The DLA Unit can be
equipped with three versatile powered unload options.

Note : the rear electric ball valves must be closed during the operation of any of the powered unload options. The manual option
override switch will need to be used to operate any of the rear options.

OPTION 1 : Rear Powered Unload

1. Ensure that the electric ball valves are all closed.


2. Turn on the manual override switch.
3. With Valve B and Valve C in the RUN position and Valve I, Valve J, and Valve K closed, remove the camlock cap on
Valve I.
4. With the air safety ball valve E closed, open Valve I. The unload will now be controlled from the cab of the prime mover.
5. Once in the cab of the prime mover, select the manual unload option in your spreader control. Refer to your spreader control
manual for more information..
6. Open the air safety ball Valve E using the switch in the cab.
7. Engage the spreader control to begin unloading.

Note: It is the owner's/operator's responsibility to ensure that the liquid is unloaded in an environmentally safe manner.

03706201-M 5/31/2016

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 25 of 273


CAUTION! Once the pump draws air, turn off the spreader control immediately to turn off the pump.
The pump can be damaged if it continues to pump air.

8. With the spreader control and pump disengaged, leave Valve I open to allow gravity to clear the remaining liquid in the lines.
9. Once fully unloaded, close Valve I. Replace the camlock cap and plug.
10. Close the air safety ball Valve E using the switch in the cab of the prime mover.

CAUTION! After fully draining the system, you will need to bleed the air in the plumbing prior to
operating the DLA Attachment when it is refilled with liquid. See the AIR BLEEDING PROCEDURE.

OPTION 2 : Powered Unload (Hose Reel / Flusher)

1. Ensure that the electric ball valves are all closed.


2. Turn on the manual override switch.
3. Turn Valve B and Valve C to the RUN position.
4. With the air safety ball valve E closed, open Valve J. Ensure Valves I and K are closed. The unload will now be controlled
from the cab of the prime mover.
5. Once in the cab of the prime mover, select the manual unload option in your spreader control. Refer to your spreader control
manual for more information..
6. Open the air safety ball Valve E using the switch in the cab.
7. Engage the spreader control to begin unloading.

Note: It is the owner's/operator's responsibility to ensure that the liquid is unloaded in an environmentally safe manner.

CAUTION! Once the pump draws air, turn off the spreader control immediately to turn off the pump.
The pump can be damaged if it continues to pump air.
8. With the spreader control and pump disengaged, leave Valve J open to allow gravity to clear the remaining liquid in the lines.
9. Once fully unloaded, close Valve J and move Valve "C" to the PURGE position. Replace the camlock cap.
10. Close the air safety ball Valve E using the switch in the cab of the prime mover.

CAUTION! After fully draining the system, you will need to bleed the air in the plumbing prior to
operating the DLA Attachment when it is refilled with liquid. See the AIR BLEEDING PROCEDURE.

FLUSH PLUMBING PROCEDURE


Note: It is the owner's/operator's responsibility to ensure that the liquid is unloaded in an environmentally safe manner.

To flush the plumbing system, follow the instructions below.

1. Ensure that the flush tank is full of the flushing liquid that is suitable for winter weather conditions (i.e. a glycol based
windshield washer fluid).
2. Move Valve B to the RUN position and Valve C to the FLUSH position.
3. Open Valve D located on the flush tank.
4. Have one person in the cab of the prime mover and another at the attachment.
5. In the cab, select manual unload on the spreader control and set it to the lowest rate. Refer to the spreader control manual for
more information.
6. Turn on all three booms in the cab (Valve F, Valve G and Valve H) and open the air safety ball valve, Valve E, using the
switch in the cab.
7. Engage the spreader control to begin flushing.
03706201-M 5/31/2016

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 26 of 273


8. The person at the Attachment will be waiting to signal the person in the cab to turn off the spreader control (pump) when the
coloured flush liquid begins coming through all of the nozzles. The total flush time varies based on the spreading rate, but
will usually take less than 30 seconds.
9. Turn off the three booms in the cab (Valve F, Valve G and Valve H) and close the air safety ball valve, Valve E, using the
switch in the cab.
10. Close Valve D, and move Valve C to the RUN position.

CAUTION! It is important not to allow the pump to draw air. Never let the flush tank go completely
empty. The size of the flush tank has been designed to completely flush the plumbing without emptying.

If you do draw air into the pump, shut off the pump immediately from the spreader control and follow the AIR BLEEDING
PROCEDURE.

AIR BLEEDING PROCEDURE (IF EQUIPPED)


If air gets into the plumbing, you will notice the pump making an unusual sound. Turn off the pump immediately to avoid
damaging the pump and follow this bleeding procedure.

1. With liquid in the main tank, move Valve B and Valve C to the RUN position.
2. Ensure that safety shut off valve E is closed. If not, close using the switch in the cab of the prime mover.
3. Open the main tank shut off valve - Valve A.
4. Place a container or bucket under the bleed line. Open Valve L, the bleed valve. Note: It is the owner's/operator's
responsibility to ensure that the liquid is unloaded in an environmentally safe manner.
5. Let the attachment sit for a few minutes or until liquid begins to flow out of the bleed valve. Note : there may be some
residual liquid in the bleed valve line, in which case there will be a small amount of liquid that will bleed out before the air is
bled out of the plumbing system.
6. Close the bleed valve.
7. Close Valve A, the main tank shut off valve.
8. The system is now primed.

03706201-M 5/31/2016

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 27 of 273


MAINTENANCE
SAFETY FIRST!! READ AND UNDERSTAND THE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE BEGINNING ANY MAINTENANCE OPERATION.
In preparation for the snow & ice control season, a visual equipment inspection must be performed. Look for any damaged
components, bends, cracked welds, hydraulic leaks, etc. Inspect all fasteners; tighten any that have loosened and replace any that are
damaged. Check all plumbing and hydraulic hoses for cuts, cracks, and/or leaks. Visually check cable(s) for loose clamps and frays.
Immediately replace any damaged or frayed cables or hoses.

DAILY INSPECTION AND LUBRICATION


Daily inspection along with periodic preventive maintenance will reduce the chance of any major repairs and down time during
equipment use. Before the unit is operated, all equipment should be inspected and checked to ensure that everything is in safe
operating condition. Any and all defects, when noted, should be scheduled for repair or immediate replacement. The following
checklist should be performed prior to and at the completion of each anti-icing/de-icing shift to ensure operational readiness.

1. Check the fluid level in the hydraulic oil reservoir. If the sight gauge indicates low oil level, add the appropriate amount of
the specified hydraulic fluid.
2. Check the level of liquid in the DLA main tank.
3. Check that all connections are correctly connected and are in working order.
4. Visually inspect the working operation of all lights, including the flashing warning lights.
5. Grease all required components (i.e. front guide rollers on the attachment).
6. Check all components for loose and/or missing fasteners. Tighten and/or replace as necessary.
7. Visually inspect all hydraulic connections and hoses for cracks and/or leaks.
8. Visually inspect all anti-icing/de-icing plumbing connections, hoses and fittings for cracks and/or leaks.
9. Check all cables for excessive wear or damage.
10. Visually inspect all caution and warning decals, including the anti-icing/de-icing sign. All decals should be complete and
legible. If cleaning the decals does not make them legible, install new decals.

03706201-M 5/31/2016

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 28 of 273


VARIABLE ORIFICE NOZZLE SET-UP
Refer to the Variable Orifice Spray Pattern Set-up diagram for assistance with the following instructions.

1. Mark targets on the ground with the dimensions given in the Spray Pattern Set-up diagram. This is the recommended pattern,
but can be changed to suit specific applications.
2. The group of four nozzles on the left will cover the left side lane. The group of four nozzles on the right will cover the right
side lane. Lastly, the two groups of two nozzles are to be directed to opposite sides of the centre lane for proper coverage.
3. Adjust each nozzle to their appropriate directions by loosening the nut, rotating the nozzle and ball assembly, and then
securing in position by tightening the nut. Hand tightening is all that is required to secure in place.
4. Using water as the liquid for aiming and set ground speed at 80km/hr and enter 80 litres per lane kilometre. Use these values
to aide in aiming the nozzles or enter the most frequently used speed and rate values. When the system is operational, use the
adjusting nut to position the nozzles to the correct spread pattern as water is being sprayed. Take precautions to avoid the
stream itself. Wind may affect the spread pattern; adjust the aiming of the nozzles to compensate.
5. The spread pattern may need to be adjusted if there is a wide range of rates to address.
6. Drain the water once the spray pattern has been set and fill the tank with your anti-icing/de-icing liquid.

FIXED ORIFICE NOZZLE SET-UP


Refer to the Fixed Orifice Spray Pattern Set-up diagram for assistance with the following instructions.

1. The spray pattern for this set-up can only be fine tuned and not altered like that of the variable orifice nozzle set-up.
2. The group of nozzles along the centre stainless spray bar cover the centre lane, while the group of nozzles on both the left
side and right side stainless spray bars cover the left and right lanes respectively.
3. The centre lane nozzles are set a fixed distance apart from one another, but can be aimed slightly by loosening the nut and
rotating the nozzle and ball assembly to the needed position. Once the position has been located, tighten the nut to secure.
Hand tightening is all that is required. The left and right groups of nozzles are stacked vertically and must be positioned
independently of each other for proper lane coverage.
4. Using water as the liquid for aiming, set ground speed to 80km/hr and enter 80 litres per lane kilometre. Use these values to
aide in aiming the nozzles or enter the most frequently used speed and rate values. Wind may affect the spread pattern, adjust
the nozzles to compensate.
5. The spread pattern may need to be adjusted if there is a wide range of rates to address. The nozzle tips can also be changed to
provide more backpressure depending on the rates required.
6. Drain the water once the spray pattern has been set and fill the tank with your anti-icing/de-icing liquid.

03706201-M 5/31/2016

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 29 of 273


THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 30 of 273


01903178
DLA 2600 GAL ASSEMBLY FRAME
MOUNT

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903178.idw Rev.4


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 31 of 273
01903178: DLA 2600 GAL ASSEMBLY FRAME MOUNT
ITEM ID ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY REQ
1 01903179 DLA FRAME MOUNTED WELD'T 1
2 01903194 BAND SECURING BRK'T BOLT ON FRAME MOUNT 2
3 01903223 DLA FRAME MNT GALVANIZING KIT 01903177 1
4 01903224 DLA FRAME MOUNTED ELECTRICAL KIT 1
5 01903282 DLA PNEUMATIC & HYDRAULIC KIT FRM MNT 1
6 03706029 DLA TANK REAR SUPPORT WELDMENT RTH 2
7 03706030 DLA TANK REAR SUPPORT WELDMENT LTH 2
8 03706063 DLA FRAME TANK STOP PLATE REAR RUBBER 3
9 03706102 BAND ADAPTER FORMED PLT TANK REF 0810920 8
10 03706166 DLA TANK FRONT SUPPORT WELDMENT 120CA 1
11 03706220 DLA ENCLOSURE W/SINGLE ROLL UP DOOR 1
12 03706221 BLANK HOSE PLT DLA ENCLOSURE 1
13 0630131 HOSE CLAMP 2 INSULATED 3
14 0650001 REFLECTOR AMBER SELF ADHEV OVAL 2
15 0650002 REFLECTOR RED SELF ADHEV OVAL 4
16 0650058 TAPE REFLECTIVE RED/WHITE 2 INCH 25
17 0810919 TANK LIQUID POLY 2635 GAL ELIPTICAL LEG 1
18 0810920 BAND FOR 2635 GAL TANK REF 0810919 4
19 0820095 DECAL WARNING HYD PRESSURE 1
20 0820099 DECAL WARNING READ MANUAL 2
21 0820108 DECAL WARNING PINCH POINT 2
22 0820165 DECAL DLA ATTACHMENT FILL VALVE 1
23 HH-00750-008 WASHER FENDER 3/8 X 1 1/2 OD ZINC 4
24 HW13R-1232 HITCH PIN 3/4 X 4 SNAP LOCK ZINC 2
25 HW14AS-06 FLATWASHER SAE 3/8 STAINLESS 42
26 HW14B-10 FLATWASHER USS 5/8 ZINC 8
27 HW14B-12 FLATWASHER USS 3/4 ZINC 4
28 HW14D-08 FLATWASHER HARDENED 1/2 ZINC 64
29 HW14D-10 FLATWASHER HARDENED 5/8 ZINC 24
30 HW36D-08 NUT HEX ELASTIC 1/2 UNC ZINC 32
31 HW36D-10 NUT HEX ELASTIC 5/8 UNC ZINC 16
32 HW36D-12 NUT HEX ELASTIC 3/4 UNC ZINC 2
33 HW36DS-06 NUT HEX ELASTIC 3/8 UNC STAINLESS 25
34 HW40A-0812 BOLT HEX 1/2 X 1 1/2 UNC ZINC 30
35 HW40A-0814 BOLT HEX 1/2 X 1 3/4 UNC ZINC 2
36 HW40A-1020 BOLT HEX 5/8 X 2 1/2 UNC ZINC 12
37 HW40A-1036 BOLT HEX 5/8 X 4 1/2 UNC ZINC 4
38 HW40A-1236 BOLT HEX 3/4 X 4 1/2 UNC ZINC 2
39 HW40AS-0610 BOLT HEX 3/8 X 1 1/4 UNC STAINLESS 21
40 HW40AS-0620 BOLT HEX 3/8 X 2 1/2 UNC STAINLESS 4

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903178.idw Rev.4


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 32 of 273
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

E08626-M & E08791-M


17
20

19

11

14

2
1 B

Page 33 of 273
A C

18

2
17

34 28 28 30

37 26 26 31

7
10
36

29 35 28 28 30 36 29 29 31
39 25 25 33
29

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903178.idw


31 DETAIL B
16 9 DETAIL C
SCALE 3 : 16
DETAIL A SCALE 3 : 16
SCALE 3 : 16
EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.
TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

Rev.4
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

E08626-M & E08791-M


11

20

22

16

SEE DWG 01903282 5


1
FOR HYDRUALICS & PNUEMATICS
19

Page 34 of 273
D 5
G
4

SEE DWG 01903224


FOR ELECTRICAL

USE COVER PLATE WHEN


SPRAY BAR IS REMOVED

12

33 39

33 25 25 39 13 15
40 23 25 33
24
DETAIL E DETAIL F 21 16 15
SCALE 3 : 16 SCALE 3 : 16
DETAIL D
SCALE 3 : 8

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903178.idw


DETAIL G 38 27 27 32
SCALE 3 : 16

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

Rev.4
01903224
DLA FRAME MOUNTED ELECTRICAL
KIT

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903224.idw Rev.4


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 35 of 273
01903224: DLA FRAME MOUNTED ELECTRICAL KIT
ITEM ID ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY REQ
1 01902019 LIGHT MTG BRKT 4 IN LED UPPER RED 1
2 03706211 AUX BOOM CONTROL SWITCH MTG PLT 1
3 0650240 GROMMET RUBBER 1" RB-256 2
4 0650249 LIGHTING KIT UNIVERSAL HARNESS GROTE 1
5 0650256 LAMP 4 IN RD LED WHITE BACK UP 3
6 0650259 LAMP 4 IN RD STT LED GROTE #53252 6
7 0650260 GROMMET 4" RD OPEN BACK GROTE91740 11
8 0650283 MAIN HARNESS UBS 7 - CONDUCTOR 1
9 0650287 PIGTAIL 2 COND 10" STOP/GND MALE PIN 5
10 0650359 HARNESS JUMPER 7FT CLR LP 1
11 0650452 LAMP FLOOD LED 4" S-SEAL 2
12 0650515 LAMP MARK LED RED RND 3/4" GR#49332 3
13 0660011 ELECTRICAL CABLE 6 COND 14GA 70
14 0660482 SWITCH ROCKER SPST SEALED IP68 1
15 0660484 TERMINAL AND SEAL KIT FOR 0660482 2
16 0660487 CABLE PLUG FOR 0660482 8
17 0660549 CABLE TIE CHASSIS/ PANEL MOUNT 31
18 0660632 HARNESS CLEARANCE ID 54" GROTE 66111 2
19 HW14AS-06 FLATWASHER SAE 3/8 STAINLESS 1
20 HW14CS-06 LOCKWASHER SPLIT 3/8 STAINLESS 1
21 HW30AS-06 NUT HEX 3/8 UNC STAINLESS 1

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903224.idw Rev.4


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 36 of 273
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX 9

16

E08626-M & E08791-M


15
1
14
7
2 5

DETAIL M
REF: 01902726 SCALE 3 : 8

REF: 01902717

DETAIL L
SCALE 3 : 16

10 9

Page 37 of 273
7

N
9
6

7
L

11

M
7

7 3

18
6

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903224.idw


12
DETAIL N
SCALE 3 : 16

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

Rev.4
0660011 - 6 WIRE HARNESS BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX
WIRE ASSIGNMENTS #1

WEATHER PACK PIN WIRE COLOUR FUNCTION

E08626-M & E08791-M


1-A RED DLA IGN POWER

1-B BLACK GROUND SWITCH


1-C YELLOW DLA CENTRE

2-A BROWN DLA IGN POWER NOTE: BOOM CONTROL SWITCH IS


USED TO BREAK THE SIGNAL COMING
2-B WHITE GROUND FROM THE SPREADER CONTROLLER
2-C GREEN DLA LEFT TO THE DEFAULT (CENTRE) ELECTRIC
BALL VALVE
SIGNAL
0660011 - 6 WIRE HARNESS INTERRUPT SIGNAL LINE USING
SOURCE POWER CENTRE
WIRE ASSIGNMENTS #2 2-WIRE CABLE (0660009) AND
GROUND BALL VALVE
WEATHERPACK CONNECTORS
WEATHER PACK PIN WIRE COLOUR Column 3
3-A RED DLA IGN POWER

3-B BLACK GROUND

3-C YELLOW DLA RIGHT

4-A BROWN FLOW METER +12V

4-B WHITE FLOW METER GROUND

4-C GREEN FLOW METER SIGNAL LIGHTING DESIGNATION

0650283 - 7 WIRE HARNESS MARKER

Page 38 of 273
WIRE ASSIGNMENTS

WIRE COLOUR FUNCTION


WHITE GROUND
WORK
BROWN MARKER / TAIL

BLACK WORK LIGHT

YELLOW LEFT TURN / TAIL


INTERIOR LIGHT WIRED TO
GREEN RIGHT TURN / TAIL REVERSE STUDS USED FOR MOUNTING 7 WIRE TAIL LIGHT CIRCUIT
GROTE BLUE SEAL CONNECTION
RED STOP / TAIL

BLUE REVERSE
ST/T/T

FLOW METER WIRING


MARKER (3-IN-A-ROW)
WIRE COLOUR FUNCTION
ST/T/T
BROWN +12V
WHITE GROUND

GREEN SIGNAL

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903224.idw


EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.
TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

Rev.4
01903282
DLA PNEUMATIC & HYDRAULIC KIT
FRAME MOUNT

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903282.idw Rev.1


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 39 of 273
01903282: DLA PNEUMATIC & HYDRAULIC KIT FRAME MOUNT
ITEM ID ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY REQ
1 01501391 HOSE HYD 3/4 100R16 0630157-48.5-0630157 1
2 01501392 HOSE HYD 3/4 100R16 0630144-51-0630157 1
3 0630085 HYD ADAPTER 1/2 MNPT 3/4 JIC TUBE 3/4 1
4 0630176 HYD ADAPTER 3/4 PIPE 3/4 JIC 1
5 0630266 HOSE CLAMP 1/2 DOUBLE HOSE INSULATED 1
6 0630323 FITTING BRASS 1/4 NPT 90 1/4 OD TUBE FEM 1
7 0630333 AIR BRAKE TUBING 1/4 20
8 0630389 HYD ADAPTER 3/4 BULKHEAD 2
9 0630660 HYD ADAP 3/4 JIC FSWIV LONG 90 3/4 MJIC 1
10 0650521 GROMMET RUBBER RND 3/8 X 5/8 X 1/16 1
11 0660549 CABLE TIE CHASSIS/ PANEL MOUNT 13
12 HW14AS-06 FLATWASHER SAE 3/8 STAINLESS 2
13 HW36DS-06 NUT HEX ELASTIC 3/8 UNC STAINLESS 1
14 HW40AS-0608 BOLT HEX 3/8 X 1 UNC STAINLESS 1

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903282.idw Rev.1


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 40 of 273
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

E08626-M & E08791-M


ROUTE 1/4 AIR LINE TO
LABELLED SWITCH IN CAB

9
2

REF: 0810947 & 0810948


PNEUMATIC BALL VALVE

7 6 DETAIL C
DETAIL A SCALE 3 : 8
SCALE 3 : 16

Page 41 of 273
3/8 GROMMET FOR AIR LINE

10 C

14 12 12 13 11
B
DETAIL B 8
REFERENCE EXTERIOR HYD HOSES

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903282.idw


SCALE 3 : 16

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

Rev.1
01903177: DLA FRAME MOUNTED INSTALL
ITEM ID ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY REQ
1 00403650 LINK 0.813B 3.000 0.813B 0.250 A 4
2 01904064 BODY HOLD DOWN WELD'T 12
3 01904150 BODY HOLD DOWN MTG SPACER PLT (SSTL) 6
4 0720609 URETHANE DIE SPRING 8
5 HW14D-10 FLATWASHER HARDENED 5/8 ZINC 80
6 HW14D-12 FLATWASHER HARDENED 3/4 ZINC 16
7 HW36D-10 NUT HEX ELASTIC 5/8 UNC ZINC 40
8 HW36D-12 NUT HEX ELASTIC 3/4 UNC ZINC 8
9 HW40A-1016 BOLT HEX 5/8 X 2 UNC ZINC 18
10 HW40A-1024 BOLT HEX 5/8 X 3 UNC ZINC 4
11 HW40A-1048 BOLT HEX 5/8 X 6 UNC ZINC 18
12 HW40A-1252 BOLT HEX 3/4 X 6 1/2 UNC ZINC 8

2 11

5
10
7
5

5 12
7 6

4
9
1
5
6
5
8
7

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903177.idw Rev.2


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 42 of 273
03706201
DLA LIQUID PLUMBING KIT ASSEMBLY

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 03706201.idw Rev.4


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 43 of 273
03706201: DLA LIQUID PLUMBING KIT ASSEMBLY

ITEM ID ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY REQ


1 00402059 LANYARD GAC 1/8 - 12 IN COATED 4
2 01903202 MTO SIGN DLA FRM MNT PURGE TANK WELD'T 1
3 03600012 PUMP MOUNTING PLATE DLA TRAILER 1
4 03706103 MTG BRK'T PNEUMATIC BALL VALVE 1
5 03706196 BALL VALVE ASSY MTG BRKT FOR 03706202 2
6 03706197 MTG BRKT 2 WAY BALL VALVE LOW PROFILE 3
7 03706202 DLA LIQUID PLUMBING KIT BALL VALVE ASS'Y 1
8 03706203 DLA LIQUID PLUMBING KIT ENCL ENTRY ASS'Y 1
9 03706204 DLA LIQUID PLUMBING KIT PUMP EXIT ASS'Y 1
10 0620069 200 SERIES WORM SCREW CLAMP 10
11 0630269 HOSE 2" PRE-WET 6.33 FT
12 0650521 GROMMET RUBBER RND 3/8 X 5/8 X 1/16 2
13 0810184 PRESSURE GAUGE 1/4 MPT 0-160 LIQUID FILL 1
14 0810192 FITTING HOSE CLAMP 9/16 - 1 1/4 HTSS 2
15 0810206 HOSE 1" PRE-WET 4 FT
16 0810207 HOSE 1 1/2" PRE-WET 1.25 FT
17 0810244 FITTING CAMLOCK 2" PLUG 1
18 0810331 HOSE 3/4" PRE-WET 3 FT
19 0810361 FITTING CAMLOCK 2" CAP 3
20 0810860 TANK POLY 10 GALLON FLUSH 1
21 0810931 FITTING POLY 2 FLANGE X 1 1/2 M-THREAD 2
22 0810935 EPDM GASKET 150 SERIES FULL PORT 1-1/2 10
23 0810942 RAPID CHECK SINUSOIDAL WAVE SENSOR 1
24 0810947 SPRING RETURN PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR 1
25 0810948 1 1/2 TYPE 21 TRUE UNION BALL VALVE 1
26 0811040 FITTING POLY 1 1/4 MNPT X 1 FNPT REDUCER 1
27 0811141 FITTING POLY 3" MNPT X 2" RED BUSHING 1
28 0811219 EPDM GASKET 220 SERIES FULL PORT 4
29 0811220 GEAR CLAMP 220 SERIES WORM STYLE 4
30 0811224 FITTING POLY 2 FLANGE X 1 1/2 90 DEG HOSE 2
31 0811258 FITTING POLY 2 FP FLANGE X 2 90 DEG BARB 1
32 0811260 BALL VALVE POLY FLANGE 2" W/ T-HANDLE 1
33 0811289 FITTING POLY 2 FP FLANGE X 2 45 DEG BARB 1
34 0811384 VALVE MANIFOLD ELECTRIC 2" 3 BANK 1
35 0811451 VALVE BALL POLY MICRO 1 MNPT 3/4 BARB 1
36 0811454 HOSE CLAMP T STYLE FOR 0810207 HOSE 1.5" 2
37 0811455 RAPID CHECK 20 BAR FLOW METER FLANGED 1
38 0811456 FITTING POLY 2 FP FLANGE X 2 MNPT 90 1
39 0811462 FITTING CAMLOCK 2 MALE X 2 SP FLANGE 3
40 0811464 FITTING POLY 2 SP FLANGE PLUG 1

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 03706201.idw Rev.4


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 44 of 273
03706201: DLA LIQUID PLUMBING KIT ASSEMBLY

ITEM ID ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY REQ


41 0811466 HOSE CLAMP T STYLE FOR 0630269 HOSE 2" 4
42 0811470 COUPLING POLY FLANGE 2 STD PORT 4.5 INCH 1
43 0811499 HOSE CLAMP T STYLE FOR 1.20 -1.34 OD 2
44 HW14A-06 FLATWASHER SAE 3/8 ZINC 8
45 HW14AS-05 FLATWASHER SAE 5/16 STAINLESS 2
46 HW14AS-06 FLATWASHER SAE 3/8 STAINLESS 30
47 HW14B-05 FLATWASHER USS 5/16 ZINC 6
48 HW14C-05 LOCKWASHER SPLIT 5/16 ZINC 6
49 HW36D-06 NUT HEX ELASTIC 3/8 UNC ZINC 4
50 HW36DS-06 NUT HEX ELASTIC 3/8 UNC STAINLESS 18
51 HW40A-0506 BOLT HEX 5/16 X 3/4 UNC ZINC 6
52 HW40A-0632 BOLT HEX 3/8 X 4 UNC ZINC 4
53 HW40AS-0508 BOLT HEX 5/16 X 1 UNC STAINLESS 2
54 HW40AS-0608 BOLT HEX 3/8 X 1 UNC STAINLESS 6
55 HW40AS-0610 BOLT HEX 3/8 X 1 1/4 UNC STAINLESS 4
56 HW40AS-0614 BOLT HEX 3/8 X 1 3/4 UNC STAINLESS 2

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 03706201.idw Rev.4


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 45 of 273
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

21 4 54 46 46 50
45 53 24 10 22

E08626-M & E08791-M


10 42
22

10

22
21
B

30
C 37
A 36
23

25

10
G
8 22

43

Page 46 of 273
15

45 DETAIL B
41 11
SCALE 1 : 4
53

16
13
34

12

36
9
10
30
22
10

22

19 6 39 10

22
DETAIL G
SCALE 1 : 4

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 03706201.idw


DETAIL C
DETAIL A
SCALE 1 : 4
SCALE 1 : 4

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

Rev.4
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

2
49 44 44 52

E08626-M & E08791-M


51

48

47

20

F
E

26

35

DETAIL E
SCALE 1 : 8 18 14

Page 47 of 273
D
8

14

29

28

32
28 29

29 28
38

41 17

33

27
41
5

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 03706201.idw


50 46 46 54 DETAIL D
55 46 46 50
SCALE 3 : 16
11
DETAIL F
SCALE 3 : 16
EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.
TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

Rev.4
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

E08626-M & E08791-M


56
29
46

46

Page 48 of 273
50

31
3

41

40

NOTE : FLANGE PLUG TO BE COUPLED TO END OF THE


LAST OPTION SELECTED OR THE ELECTRIC VALVE MANIFOLD

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 03706201.idw


EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.
TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

Rev.4
4 3 2 1

D D
PURGE TANK
MAIN TANK

E08626-M & E08791-M


BLEED EXIT
(IF EQUIPPED)

VALVE D VALVE L
VALVE A PURGE TANK BLEED VALVE
TANK SHUT OFF SHUT OFF
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

C C
TANK FILL

FILTER

VALVE B
FILL/RUN VALVE CHECK VALVE

CENTRIFUGAL PUMP
VALVE C
PURGE/RUN VALVE FLOWMETER

Page 49 of 273
ELECTRIC BALL VALVE MANIFOLD

B B
CHECK VALVE

VALVE E
PNEUMATIC BALL VALVE

VALVE K VALVE F
FRONT EXIT AUXILIARY KIT LEFT LANE SPRAY BOOM
(IF EQUIPPED)
VALVE H VALVE G
RIGHT LANE SPRAY BOOM CENTRE LANE SPRAY BOOM
A VALVE J VALVE I A
HOSE REEL KIT REAR EXIT AUXILIARY KIT
(IF EQUIPPED) (IF EQUIPPED)

4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1

VALVE E
PNEUMATIC BALL VALVE

D D

VALVE H - RIGHT BOOM

E08626-M & E08791-M


VALVE G - CENTRE BOOM

VALVE K - FRONT AUX. EXIT


M (IF EQUIPPED)
VALVE F - LEFT BOOM

VALVE J - HOSE REEL


(IF EQUIPPED)

VALVE I - REAR AUX. EXIT


(IF EQUIPPED)
L

DETAIL M
C SCALE 1 : 8 C

VALVE D
PURGE TANK SHUT OFF VALVE A - MAIN TANK SHUT OFF

Page 50 of 273
B B

DETAIL N
SCALE 3 : 16
VALVE C - PURGE/RUN

A FILL PORT A
VALVE B - FILL/RUN

DETAIL L
SCALE 3 : 16

4 3 2 1
03706202
DLA LIQUID PLUMBING KIT BALL
VALVE ASSEMBLY

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 03706202.idw Rev.2


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 51 of 273
03706202: DLA LIQUID PLUMBING KIT BALL VALVE ASSEMBLY

ITEM ID ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY REQ


1 0810195 FITTING POLY 3/4" MPT X 3/4" BARB 90 DEG 1
2 0811219 EPDM GASKET 220 SERIES FULL PORT 5
3 0811220 GEAR CLAMP 220 SERIES WORM STYLE 5
4 0811232 FITTING POLY 2 FP FLANGE PLUG X 3/4 FPT 1
5 0811258 FITTING POLY 2 FP FLANGE X 2 90 DEG BARB 1
6 0811448 VALVE BALL POLY 3 WAY 2 FULL PORT FLANGE 2
7 0811452 CAMLOCK POLY 2 FEM X 2 FULL PORT FLANGE 1
8 0811453 COUPLING POLY FLANGE 2 FULL PORT 6 INCH 1
9 0811476 MTG PLT 3 WAY BALL VALVE A 2

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 03706202.idw Rev.2


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 52 of 273
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

E08626-M & E08791-M


TO TANK

7 3 2 9 6 2 3 6 9 2 3 4 1

LIQUID FILL
COUPLER

Page 53 of 273
FROM FLUSH TANK

8
TO LIQUID PUMP

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 03706202.idw


EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.
TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

Rev.2
This Page Left Blank

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 54 of 273


03706203
DLA LIQUID PLUMBING KIT
ENCLOSURE ENTRY ASSEMBLY

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 03706203.idw Rev.2


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 55 of 273
03706203: DLA LIQUID PLUMBING KIT ENCLOSURE ENTRY ASSEMBLY

ITEM ID ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY REQ


1 0620068 100 SERIES WORM SCREW CLAMP 2
2 0810939 EPDM MANIFOLD GASKET 1 2
3 0811219 EPDM GASKET 220 SERIES FULL PORT 2
4 0811220 GEAR CLAMP 220 SERIES WORM STYLE 2
5 0811230 FITTING POLY 2 FP FLANGE X 2 HOSE BARB 1
6 0811450 FITTING POLY 1 FLANGE X 1 HOSE BARB 90 1
7 0811456 FITTING POLY 2 FP FLANGE X 2 MNPT 90 1
8 0811457 FITTING POLY TEE 2" FULL PORT 1" FLANGED 1
9 0811458 VALVE CHECK POLY 1 PSI 1 FLANGE 1
10 0811467 FITTING POLY BULKHEAD 2 FP FLANGE 2 FNPT 1

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 03706203.idw Rev.2


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 56 of 273
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

FROM 03706202

10

4 3 8 4 3 5

FROM PRESSURE
SPIKE VALVE

9
ARROW MUST POINT DETAIL A
DOWN TOWARDS TEE SCALE 1 : 1 A

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 57 of 273 This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 03706203.idw Rev. 2
This Page Left Blank

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 58 of 273


03706204
DLA LIQUID PLUMBING KIT PUMP EXIT
ASSEMBLY

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 03706204.idw Rev.3


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 59 of 273
03706204: DLA LIQUID PLUMBING KIT PUMP EXIT ASSEMBLY

ITEM ID ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY REQ


1 0620068 100 SERIES WORM SCREW CLAMP 2
2 0620069 200 SERIES WORM SCREW CLAMP 4
3 0810935 EPDM GASKET 150 SERIES FULL PORT 1-1/2 4
4 0810939 EPDM MANIFOLD GASKET 1 2
5 0811227 FITTING POLY 2 FLANGE PLUG C/W 1/4 FPT 1
6 0811228 FITTING POLY 2 PORT FLANGED TEE 1
7 0811233 MANIFOLD 2" Y STRAINER 50 MESH SCREEN 1
8 0811449 FITTING POLY TEE 2" STD PORT 1" FLANGED 1
9 0811450 FITTING POLY 1 FLANGE X 1 HOSE BARB 90 1
10 0811470 COUPLING POLY FLANGE 2 STD PORT 4.5 INCH 1
11 0811501 POLY PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE 75 PSI 1

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 03706204.idw Rev.3


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 60 of 273
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

E08626-M & E08791-M


SYSTEM PRESSURE
GAUGE PORT

10 3 2 7 3 2 2

DETAIL B
SCALE 3 : 4
TO FLOW METER

Page 61 of 273
3

9 4 1 11 4 1 8

TO 03706203

FROM LIQUID PUMP


DISCHARGE PORT

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 03706204.idw


EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.
TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

Rev.3
0811474
PUMP ANTI ICE HYPRO 9303C-HM1C-U

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 0811474.idw Rev.1


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 62 of 273
03706163
DLA SPRAY BAR ASSEMBLY 1 1/2 FIXED
WIDE MOUNT

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 03706163.idw


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 63 of 273
03706163: DLA SPRAY BAR ASSEMBLY 1 1/2 FIXED WIDE MOUNT
ITEM ID ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY REQ
1 00402059 LANYARD GAC 1/8 - 12 IN COATED 3
2 03706094 DLA SPRAY BAR WELD'T WIDE 1
3 03706189 STAINLESS HYD TUBE CLAMP 48.3MM 8
4 03706190 DLA SPRAY BAR CENTRE BOOM ASSEMBLY 1
5 03706191 DLA SPRAY BAR SIDE BOOM ASSEMBLY 2
6 03706195 HOSE COLLECTOR MTG PLT DLA ENCLOSURE 1
7 0620032 RUBBER PLUG 1 O.D. X 1/2 GR DIA X 3/16 2
8 0650520 GROMMET RUBBER RND 1 3/4 X 2 5/16 X 1/16 3
9 0660114 CABLE TIE 3/16 X 14 1/2 BLACK 7
10 0810207 HOSE 1 1/2" PRE-WET 20
11 0810244 FITTING CAMLOCK 2" PLUG 3
12 0811454 HOSE CLAMP T STYLE FOR 0810207 HOSE 1.5" 6
13 0811496 CAMLOCK 2 FEM X 1 1/2 HOSE BARB 3
14 HW14AS-06 FLATWASHER SAE 3/8 STAINLESS 16
15 HW36DS-06 NUT HEX ELASTIC 3/8 UNC STAINLESS 8
16 HW40AS-0608 BOLT HEX 3/8 X 1 UNC STAINLESS 2
17 HW40AS-0636 BOLT HEX 3/8 X 4 1/2 UNC STAINLESS 8
18 0810969 NOZZLE STAINLESS THREADED 1GPM OPT
19 0810902 NOZZLE STAINLESS THREADED 2GPM OPT
20 0810855 NOZZLE STAINLESS THREADED 3GPM OPT
21 0810856 NOZZLE STAINLESS THREADED 4GPM OPT
22 0810960 NOZZLE STAINLESS THREADED 6GPM OPT

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 03706163.idw Rev.7


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 64 of 273
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

Nozzle Positioning:
Adjust each nozzle to their appropriate directions by loosening

E08626-M & E08791-M


the nut, rotating the nozzle and ball assembly, and then securing
in position by tightening the nut. Hand tightening is all that is
required to secure in place.
11

7
1
8

16
13
DETAIL AF
SCALE 1 : 4

12
AD DETAIL AD
10
SCALE 1 : 4
2

Page 65 of 273
AF

5 17
4 14
AE
14

15

AG

DETAIL AG
SCALE 1 : 4
DETAIL AE
SCALE 3 : 16

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 03706163.idw


EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.
TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

Rev.7
03706190: DLA SPRAY BAR CENTRE BOOM ASSEMBLY
ITEM ID ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY REQ
1 0620069 200 SERIES WORM SCREW CLAMP 4
2 0640627 FITTING PIPE 1 1/2 NPT FEM TEE 304 SS 1
3 0640628 FITTING PIPE 1 1/2 NPT CAP 304 SS 2
4 0640630 FITTING PIPE 1 1/2 NPT X 36 LG 304 SS 2
5 0810931 FITTING POLY 2 FLANGE X 1 1/2 M-THREAD 3
6 0810935 EPDM GASKET 150 SERIES FULL PORT 1-1/2 4
7 0811223 FITTING POLY 2 FLANGE X 1 1/2 HOSE BARB 1
8 0811224 FITTING POLY 2 FLANGE X 1 1/2 90 DEG HOSE 1
9 0811382 VALVE CHECK POLY SPRING 1 1/2 FNPT 5PSI 1
10 0811386 NOZZLE ASSY TJET CLIP-EYELET 1 1/2 12
11 0811465 VALVE BALL POLY 3 WAY 2 STD PORT FLANGE 1

5 9 5 7 6 1

1
3-WAY BALL VALVE
USED FOR CATCH TEST
6

8
5

6
3

11
10

1
2

6
4

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 03706190.idw Rev.2


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 66 of 273
03706191: DLA SPRAY BAR SIDE BOOM ASSEMBLY
ITEM ID ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY REQ
1 0620069 200 SERIES WORM SCREW CLAMP 1
2 0640628 FITTING PIPE 1 1/2 NPT CAP 304 SS 1
3 0640629 FITTING PIPE 1 1/2 NPT 90 ELBOW 304 SS 1
4 0640631 FITTING PIPE 1 1/2 NPT X 24 LG 304 SS 1
5 0810158 FITTING POLY 1 1/2 MPT CLOSE NIPPLE 1
6 0810931 FITTING POLY 2 FLANGE X 1 1/2 M-THREAD 1
7 0810935 EPDM GASKET 150 SERIES FULL PORT 1-1/2 1
8 0811223 FITTING POLY 2 FLANGE X 1 1/2 HOSE BARB 1
9 0811382 VALVE CHECK POLY SPRING 1 1/2 FNPT 5PSI 1
10 0811386 NOZZLE ASSY TJET CLIP-EYELET 1 1/2 6

10

0810856 - NOZZLE
SHOWN AS REFERENCE

7 1
3
6
9 5

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 03706191.idw Rev.2


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 67 of 273
01903293: DLA RUBBER FLAP MOUNTING ASSEMBLY FRAME MOUNT
ITEM ID ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY REQ
1 01901166 RUBBER FLAP SPRAY BAR HAMILTON 1
2 01901169 RUBBER FLAP PLATE SPRAY BAR HAMILTON 1
3 01903292 RUBBER FLAP MTG BRK'T FRAME MNT 2
4 03706183 RUBBER FLAP MTG PLT SLIDE IN DLA 1
5 HW14A-08 FLATWASHER SAE 1/2 ZINC 28
6 HW36D-08 NUT HEX ELASTIC 1/2 UNC ZINC 14
7 HW40A-0814 BOLT HEX 1/2 X 1 3/4 UNC ZINC 10
8 HW40A-0824 BOLT HEX 1/2 X 3 UNC ZINC 4

4 3 8 5 5 6

1
2

6 5 5 7

6 5 5 7

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903293.idw Rev.1


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 68 of 273
01903279
FRAME MNT ALUMINUM FENDER KIT 54
SPREAD

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903279.idw Rev.1


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 69 of 273
01903279: FRAME MNT ALUMINUM FENDER KIT 54 SPREAD
ITEM ID ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY REQ
1 01301231 MUD FLAP MOUNTING BAR ZINC PLATED 4
2 01902534 FENDER MOUNTING ATTACHMENT ASS'Y 2
3 01903280 FENDER SUPPORT ASS'Y REAR LTH RED 1
4 01903281 FENDER SUPPORT ASS'Y REAR RTH RED 1
5 01903283 LICENCE PLATE MTG BRK'T MUDFLAP MOUNT 1
6 0620051 WASHER RUBBER 1 1/2 OD X 5/8 ID X 1/4 TH 16
7 0630255 HOSE CLAMP 1/4 RUBBER 67166-00 20
8 0650152 PIGTAIL SEALED MARKER LAMP 5
9 0650277 LAMP LICENCE & BRKT KIT GROTE 60280 1
10 0650285 JUMPER HARNESS 2 WIRE JP 2 CD CA 3
11 0650290 HARNESS JUMPER 2 COND 30 IN GROTE 66155 1
12 0650291 HARNESS JUMPER 2 COND 12 IN GROTE 66165 1
13 0650360 HARNESS JUMPER 4'7" CLR LP 3
14 0720039 FENDER SET ALUMINUM TA 55" SPREAD 1
15 0720063 MUD FLAP VIKING LOGO BLK/WHITE 24 X 36 4
16 0720064 ANTI SAIL BRACKET 2
17 41901023 FENDER SUPPORT ASS'Y LTH 1
18 41901024 FENDER SUPPORT ASS'Y RTH 1
19 HH-00750-008 WASHER FENDER 3/8 X 1 1/2 OD ZINC 16
20 HW14A-06 FLATWASHER SAE 3/8 ZINC 46
21 HW14AS-04 FLATWASHER SAE 1/4 STAINLESS 4
22 HW14B-06 FLATWASHER USS 3/8 ZINC 4
23 HW14D-10 FLATWASHER HARDENED 5/8 ZINC 24
24 HW36D-06 NUT HEX ELASTIC 3/8 UNC ZINC 36
25 HW36D-10 NUT HEX ELASTIC 5/8 UNC ZINC 12
26 HW36DS-04 NUT HEX ELASTIC 1/4 UNC STAINLESS 4
27 HW40A-0610 BOLT HEX 3/8 X 1 1/4 UNC ZINC 4
28 HW40A-0612 BOLT HEX 3/8 X 1 1/2 UNC ZINC 16
29 HW40A-0614 BOLT HEX 3/8 X 1 3/4 UNC ZINC 12
30 HW40A-0618 BOLT HEX 3/8 X 2 1/4 UNC ZINC 4
31 HW40A-1016 BOLT HEX 5/8 X 2 UNC ZINC 12
32 HW40AS-0406 BOLT HEX 1/4 X 3/4 UNC STAINLESS 4

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903279.idw Rev.1


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 70 of 273
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

E08626-M & E08791-M


17

5 14
2
32

21

26
3
G
32

DETAIL F 21 18
9 DETAIL G
SCALE 1 : 4
26 F SCALE 1 : 8

H
4

Page 71 of 273
18
31

23

23 28 31

25 19 23
28
6 27 30 23
19
20 20 22 25
29
6
24 7 7
20
20
20 20
7
24
24 24
20

24
29 7 20 24

1
1
REAR PASSENGER SIDE FRONT PASSENGER SIDE 15

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903279.idw


SCALE 1 : 8 SCALE 1 : 8
16

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

Rev.1
01903279: FRAME MNT ALUMINUM FENDER KIT 54 SPREAD

FROM JUNCTION BOX

10

GOES ACROSS FRAME


CROSS-MEMBER

13
13 13
DRIVER
8
FRONT
MARKER
12

10 8

10
11 PASSENGER
FRONT
MARKER

8 8

LICENSE DRIVER PASSENGER


PLATE REAR REAR
LAMP MARKER MARKER

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903279.idw Rev.1


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 72 of 273
01903196
MTO CONSPICUITY SIGN KIT DLA (SSTL)

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903196.idw Rev.7


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 73 of 273
01903196: MTO CONSPICUITY SIGN KIT DLA (SSTL)

ITEM ID ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY REQ


1 01902717 MTO CONSPICUITY SIGN MAIN FRAME (SSTL) 1
2 01902726 MTO CONSP SIGN AIR FOIL ASS'Y (SSTL) 1
3 01902762 MTO SIGN MINIBAR MTG PLT PL (SSTL) 1
4 01903197 MTO SIGN KIT DLA FRM MNT WELD'T 1
5 01904182 MTO SIGN PANEL REAR BRACE PLT (201SS) 2
6 0620051 WASHER RUBBER 1 1/2 OD X 5/8 ID X 1/4 TH 4
7 0650184 GROMMET RUBBER RND 5/16 X 1 X 3/16 1
8 0650451 LAMP MINIBAR LED AMBER/BLUE SWS 16397 1
9 0660009 ELECTRICAL CABLE 2 COND 14GA SJOW 25
10 0660011 ELECTRICAL CABLE 6 COND 14GA 7.5
11 0660114 CABLE TIE 3/16 X 14 1/2 BLACK 8
12 0660176 CONN 6-WAY TOWER W/P 1
13 0660207 RELAY 40A/30A 12V SPST(ZETTLER) 1
14 0660502 HARNESS KIT RELAY PWR FEED 30A FUSE 1
15 0660551 CABLE TIE PUSH MOUNT FOR 0.04"-0.62" PLT 8
16 0660569 HARNESS MTO FRAME TO TRUCK BODY 1
17 0660575 TRAILER REC 7-WAY 40FT YL MOLD 1
18 HW14A-08 FLATWASHER SAE 1/2 ZINC 12
19 HW14AS-06 FLATWASHER SAE 3/8 STAINLESS 27
20 HW14C-08 LOCKWASHER SPLIT 1/2 ZINC 4
21 HW14D-10 FLATWASHER HARDENED 5/8 ZINC 4
22 HW14ES-04 FLATWASHER LARGE OD 1/4 STAINLESS 36
23 HW36D-08 NUT HEX ELASTIC 1/2 UNC ZINC 4
24 HW36D-10 NUT HEX ELASTIC 5/8 UNC ZINC 2
25 HW36DS-04 NUT HEX ELASTIC 1/4 UNC STAINLESS 18
26 HW36DS-06 NUT HEX ELASTIC 3/8 UNC STAINLESS 15
27 HW40A-0810 BOLT HEX 1/2 X 1 1/4 UNC ZINC 4
28 HW40A-0840 BOLT HEX 1/2 X 5 UNC ZINC 4
29 HW40A-1036 BOLT HEX 5/8 X 4 1/2 UNC ZINC 2
30 HW40AS-0408 BOLT HEX 1/4 X 1 UNC STAINLESS 10
31 HW40AS-0410 BOLT HEX 1/4 X 1-1/4 UNC STAINLESS 8
32 HW40AS-0610 BOLT HEX 3/8 X 1 1/4 UNC STAINLESS 12
33 HW40CS-0610 BOLT CARRIAGE 3/8 X 1 1/4 UNC STAINLESS 3
34 NI-50710 CONN 6-WAY SHROUD W/P 1
35 NI-50733 CONN PIN 16-14GA W/P 6
36 NI-50735 CONN SOC 16-14 GA W/P 6
37 NI-50737 CONN SEAL GREY 16-14GA W/P 12

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903196.idw Rev.7


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 74 of 273
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

E08626-M & E08791-M


8

3
8
12
3
34 NOTE: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN
BOLTS ON SIGNBOARD OR SIGNBOARD
MAY CRACK! 12

34

2
2
32 19 19 26

29 21 21 24

4
30

22
1

Page 75 of 273
25

32 19 19 26

4 15 11

16
17 31 22 6 22 25
17
NOTE: RUBBER WASHER BETWEEN
BRACE AND BACKSIDE OF SIGN
16 PANEL 27 20 18

23 18 18 28

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903196.idw


EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.
TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

Rev.7
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

E08626-M & E08791-M


Page 76 of 273
This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903196.idw
EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.

Rev.
TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

E08626-M & E08791-M


Page 77 of 273
This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903196.idw
EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.

Rev.
TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

E08626-M & E08791-M


Page 78 of 273
This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903196.idw
EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.

Rev.
TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

E08626-M & E08791-M


Page 79 of 273
This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903196.idw
EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.

Rev.
TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.
01902726: MTO CONSPICUITY SIGN AIR FOIL ASSEMBLY (SSTL)

ITEM ID ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY REQ


1 01902727 MTO CONSP SIGN AIR FOIL SKIN (SSTL) 1
2 01902728 MTO CONSP SIGN AIR FOIL BRK'T (201SS) 2
3 01902732 MTO SIGN AIR FOIL BEACON MOUNT (SSTL) 2
4 0650058 TAPE REFLECTIVE RED/WHITE 2 INCH 1
5 0650450 LAMP BEACON LED AMB/BLU SWS 22122 2
6 0650499 LAMP STT LED RND 4" PETERSON 9 DIODE 2
7 0650500 LAMP MARK LED RED RND 2 1/2" PETERSON 3
8 0650501 GROMMET RUBBER 4IN PETERSON OPEN BACK 2
9 0650502 GROMMET RUBBER 2 1/2 PETERSON OPEN BACK 3
10 0660549 CABLE TIE CHASSIS/ PANEL MOUNT 13
11 0660581 HARNESS MTO FRAME 1
12 HW14AS-04 FLATWASHER SAE 1/4 STAINLESS 16
13 HW14AS-06 FLATWASHER SAE 3/8 STAINLESS 24
14 HW36DS-04 NUT HEX ELASTIC 1/4 UNC STAINLESS 8
15 HW36DS-06 NUT HEX ELASTIC 3/8 UNC STAINLESS 12
16 HW40AS-0406 BOLT HEX 1/4 X 3/4 UNC STAINLESS 8
17 HW40AS-0610 BOLT HEX 3/8 X 1 1/4 UNC STAINLESS 12

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01902726.idw


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 80 of 273
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

E08626-M & E08791-M


4
7 11/16

Page 81 of 273
5

1 11

14 12 12 16

8 6 17 13 13 15 7 9 10

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01902726.idw


EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.
TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.
01902717: MTO CONSPICUITY SIGN MAIN FRAME (SSTL)

ITEM ID ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY REQ


1 01902718 MTO SIGN MAIN FRAME TOP WELD'T (SSTL) 1
2 01902721 MTO SIGN MAIN FRAME SIDE PLT (201SS) 2
3 01902724 MTO SIGN MAIN FRAME LWR PLT (201SS) 1
4 01902725 MTO SIGN MAIN FRAME CORNER PLT (SSTL) 4
5 0650181 GROMMET RUBBER RND 1 1/2 X 2 1/8 X 1/4 7
6 0650448 VERTICAL LIGHT BAR 12 LED SWS 56043 4
7 0660549 CABLE TIE CHASSIS/ PANEL MOUNT 18
8 0660580 HARNESS MTO FRAME 1
9 HW14AS-06 FLATWASHER SAE 3/8 STAINLESS 32
10 HW36DS-06 NUT HEX ELASTIC 3/8 UNC STAINLESS 16
11 HW40AS-0610 BOLT HEX 3/8 X 1 1/4 UNC STAINLESS 16

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01902717.idw


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 82 of 273
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

E08626-M & E08791-M


5
7 1 2

8
6
7

Page 83 of 273
4 11 9 10 3
SQUARE CORNERS

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01902717.idw


EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.
TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

E08626-M & E08791-M


72

A
END VIEW

1
2 6
7
3 5
4
SECTION A-A
SCALE 1 : 1
A

DELPHI WEATHER-PACK BOBTAIL 7 WIRE PLUG


CABLE MIN. RATING

Page 84 of 273
6-WAY SHROUD 20A (MOLD-O6P) YELLOW TPU (MOLDED)
14 AWG/6, -40°C, 300V
12010975 QTY:1
W-PACK CONNECTOR TRAILER CONNECTOR
12124582 QTY:6
PIN DESCRIPTION 15324983 QTY:6 SOCKET DESCRIPTION
A/WT GROUND 1/WT GROUND
B/RD 12VDC 2/BK STOP
C/BN I-NETWORK 3/YL LH TURN
D/GN RH TURN 4/RD 12VDC
E/YL LH TURN 5/GN RH TURN
F/BK STOP 6/BN I-NETWORK
7/BU SPARE

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 0660569.idw


EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.
TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

Rev.1
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

0650451 MINIBAR - MTO WIRING CONFIGURATION

E08626-M & E08791-M


BLACK
RED
WHITE
BLUE
YELLOW
VIOLET
REF:
0660176

Page 85 of 273
6-WIRE MALE
WEATHER PACK

WEATHERPACK VCL HARNESS WIRE FUNCTION LOCATION (WHERE WIRE IS TO BE CONNECTED) MINIBAR WIRES
REF:
NI-50710
A WHITE GROUND ANY TRUCK GROUND BLACK
B RED POSITIVE AMBER 15A SWITCH OR RELAY 12V IGN POWER RED

WHITE
RED
BROWN
GREEN
YELLOW
BLACK
C BROWN i-NETWORK ONLY CONNECTS WITH MTO TRAILER RECEPTACLE WHITE

6 - WIRE CABLE D GREEN BLUE BLUE STROBE SWITCH IN DASH BLUE


TO BETTS BOX

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903196.idw


E YELLOW AMBER AMBER 15A SWITCH OR RELAY 12V IGN POWER YELLOW
 F BLACK AUTO DIM AMBER 15A SWITCH OR RELAY 12V IGN POWER VIOLET

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

Rev.1
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

0660575 - TRAILER REC 7-WAY 40FT YL MOLD

E08626-M & E08791-M


MTO SIGN BOARD CONFIGURATION

Page 86 of 273
RECEPTACLE OUTER FACE

MTO CONFIGURATION - 7-WAY CONNECTOR (YELLOW)


PIN WIRE COLOUR DESCRIPTION LOCATION (WHERE WIRE IS TO BE CONNECTED)
1 WHITE GROUND ANY BODY OR TRUCK GROUND

2 BLACK STOP STOP WIRE ON BODY OR TRUCK

3 YELLOW LTH TURN LTH TURN WIRE ON BODY OR TRUCK

4 RED 12V POWER AMBER 15A SWITCH OR RELAY 12V IGN POWER

5 GREEN RTH TURN RTH TURN WIRE ON BODY OR TRUCK

6 BROWN I-NETWORK I-NETWORK WIRE FROM MINIBAR

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01903196.idw


7 BLUE SPARE/AUX CAP IN BETTS BOX ON TRUCK

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

Rev.1
0820140
MTO CONSPICUITY SIGN PANEL -
ANTI-ICING

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 0820140.idw Rev.2


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 87 of 273
This Page Left Blank

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 88 of 273


ELECTRICAL

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 89 of 273


This Page Left Blank

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 90 of 273


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 91 of 273
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 92 of 273


0660274
JUNCTION BOX BETTS 18 POLE

ITEM ITEM NO. ALT. ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY REQ


1 JUNCTION BOX BASE BETTS 18 POLE 1
2 0660375 920450 LID FOR 0660274 JUNCTION BOX BETTS 1
2A 920449 SCREW 4
2B LID 1
3 0660352 920209 BUSSBAR FOR BETTS 18 POLE JUNCTION BOX 2
4 920216 FITTING ENTRANCE 1/2 NPT .125-.375 2
5 920412 SQ. HEAD PLUG 1/2" N.P.T. 4
6 920414 HARDWARE PACKAGE 1

Note: An alpha designation on the Item ID column indicates a sub-component of a parent item. When placing parts orders
reference the parent item to receive a complete assembly. Individual items can be ordered separately, if required, by
ordering the alpha designated item number.

3
6
6 1
6

2B
2A

THIS OWNER'S MANUAL FILE IS CONTAINED WITHIN 0660274.idw, REV 1


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 93 of 273
0660502: HARNESS KIT RELAY PWR FEED 30A FUSE
ITEM ID ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY REQ
1 RELAY SOCKET 40A 1
2 RELAY IGNITION 40A 1
3 ELECTRICAL WIRE 12 GA RED TYPE GXL 1
4 ELECTRICAL WIRE 12 GA WHITE TYPE GXL 1
5 ELECTRICAL WIRE 12 GA BLACK TYPE GXL 1
6 ELECTRICAL WIRE 16 GA WHITE TYPE GXL 1
7 ELECTRICAL WIRE 16 GA PURPLE TYPE GXL 1
8 0660056 LOOM SPLIT PLASTIC 3/8 1
9 0660167 FUSE HOLDER MAX 20 AMP ATO 1
10 0660227 FUSE 2 AMP ATO 1
11 FUSE HOLDER & COVER 30 AMP 12AWG ATO MAXI 1
12 FUSE 30 AMP ATO MAXI 1
13 NI-50135 ELEC. TERMINAL RING 0.25 PVC 16/14GA 2
14 ELEC. TERMINAL BUTT NON-INSUL 12GA 2
15 ELEC. TERMINAL RING 3/8 NON-INSUL 2
16 HEAT SHRINK TUBING ADHESIVE LINED 3/8 3
17 NI-50388 ELEC. TERMINAL 16GA BUTT BLUE 2

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 0660502.idw Rev.2


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 94 of 273
BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

E08626-M & E08791-M


0660502 - HARNESS KIT RELAY PWR FEED 30A FUSE

TABLE 4 5
RELAY PIN DESCRIPTION COLOUR GAUGE
30 +12V BATTERY FEED RED 8
87 +12V SWITCHED BLACK 8 8

85 IGNITION PURPLE 16
86 GROUND WHITE 14
-12V BATTERY GND WHITE 8
60

13 17 10 9 17

3
7

Page 95 of 273
4 21
120

3 120
180

13 6 1 2

15 15 16 16 14 12 11 14 16

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 0660502.idw


EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.
TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

Rev.2
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK

01901288-M 1/8/2014

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 96 of 273


HYDRAULICS

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 97 of 273


THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK

01901288-M 1/8/2014

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 98 of 273


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 99 of 273
01501217
HYD OIL TANK WELD'T 350SCL

ITEM ID ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION QTY REQ


1 0560016 SIGHT GAUGE OIL LEVEL WITH THERMOMETER 1
2 0560033 GASKET CLEAN OUT OIL TANK 1
3 01501012 COVER PLATE WELD'T 20GAL HYD OIL TANK 1
4 HW40A-0406 BOLT HEX 1/4 X 3/4 UNC ZINC 8
5 HW14C-04 LOCKWASHER SPLIT 1/4 ZINC 8
6 HW14A-04 FLATWASHER SAE 1/4 ZINC 8
7 0560014 FILLER STRAINER BREATHER CAP 40 MICRON 1
8 01501013 MAGNET BAR WELD'T - 16.750 1

4 7

5 3

6 2

THIS OWNER'S MANUAL FILE IS CONTAINED WITHIN 01501217.idw, REV 4


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 100 of 273
01900090
PUMP ASSEMBLY KIT METARIS SINGLE
MHP20A

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01900090.idw


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 101 of 273
01900090

PUMP ASSEMBLY KIT METARIS SINGLE MHP20A

ITEM ID ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION QTY REQ


1 0550202 PUMP HYD SINGLE P20A 1 3/4" 1
2 0630661 HOSE CLAMP FOR 1 1/4 SUCTION LINE BARB 4
3 0630209 HYD ADAPTER 1 1/4 MORB 1 1/4 HOSE 1
4 0630008 HOSE HYD 1 1/4 SUCTION LINE 100R4 15
5 0630129 HOSE CLAMP 1 3/4 INSULATED 5
6 0630130 HOSE CLAMP 3/4 SINGLE HOSE INSULATED 3
7 0660115 CABLE TIE 5/16 X 14 1/2 BLACK 200
8 0660114 CABLE TIE 3/16 X 14 1/2 BLACK 200
9 0640329 FITTING PIPE B M 90 STREET ELBOW 1 1/4 1
10 0630321 HYD ADAPTER 1 1/4 MNPT NIPPLE 1
11 0530124 BALL VALVE 1 1/4 NPT 1
12 0630207 HYD HOSE END LP 1 1/4 MNPT 1 1/4 BARB 1
13 0630590 HYD ADAPTER 1 1/4 MSAE 3/4MJIC STR 1
14 0630229 HYD ADAP 1 1/4 FNPT 45 1 1/4 MNPT SWIV 1
15 0550455 PUMP DRIVESHAFT INST'L KIT 1

01900090-M 5/13/2014

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 102 of 273


BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

E08626-M & E08791-M


10
14
11
12

Page 103 of 273


13

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01900090.idw


EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.
TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.
01501082
MANIFOLD HYDRAULIC RETURN LINE

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01501082.idw


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 104 of 273
01901852
STAINLESS HOSE HANGER KIT 120 LG

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01901852.idw


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 105 of 273
01901852

STAINLESS HOSE HANGER KIT 120 LG

ITEM ID ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION QTY REQ


1 00403218 BOSS RS 0.563B 1.500 X 2.000 X 0.375 SS 2
2 00403219 LUG 0.56B 0.75X0.75Y 1.50W12.00H 0.375T SS 2
3 00403220 TUBE RD 1.315N 1.049N 120.000S 1
4 00403221 TUBE RD 1.660N 1.380N 5.000S 1
5 HW14AS-08 FLATWASHER SAE 1/2 STAINLESS 4
6 HW14CS-08 LOCKWASHER SPLIT 1/2 STAINLESS 2
7 HW30AS-08 NUT HEX 1/2 UNC STAINLESS 2
8 HW40AS-0814 BOLT HEX 1/2 X 1 3/4 UNC STAINLESS 2

01901852-M 4/8/2014

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 106 of 273


BOX 1120, NORPARK DRIVE, MOUNT FOREST, ONT. N0G 2L0 (519)323-4433 PH (519)323-4608 FX

E08626-M & E08791-M


4

Page 107 of 273


3

5 6 7 8

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01901852.idw


EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.
TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.
01900606: HIGH PRESSURE FILTER KIT MP FILTRI (1")

ITEM ID ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY REQ


1 01900033 FILTER MTG BRK'T MP FILTRI HP FILTER 1
2 0560103 FILTER ASSY HP MP FILTRI SAE20 LONG BOWL 1
3 0630216 HYD ADAPTER 1 MORB 1 MJIC STR 2
4 HW14B-06 FLATWASHER USS 3/8 ZINC 3
5 HW40A-0605 BOLT HEX 3/8 X 5/8 UNC ZINC 3

4 5

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 01900606.idw


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 108 of 273
0560103
FILTER ASSY HP SAE16 LONG BOWL

0560104 : 10 MICRON REPLACEMENT FILTER ELEMENT

EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE EXACTLY AS SHOWN. SOME COMPONENTS MAY BE OPTIONAL.


TO MAINTAIN OUR ON-GOING PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND IMPROVEMENT PROGRAM, VIKING-CIVES LTD. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE EQUIPMENT & SPECIFICATION WITHOUT NOTICE.

This Owner's Manual File is Contained Within 0560103.idw


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 109 of 273
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK

01901288-M 1/8/2014

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 110 of 273


Appendix A
Metaris Tandem Hydraulic Pump

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 111 of 273


This Page Left Blank

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 112 of 273


GEAR PUMPS AND MOTORS

FLUID POWER FOR MOBILE EQUIPMENT


METARIS pumps and motors are particularly well suited for heavy duty mobile equipment applications.
They are designed for extreme duty cycles and continuous heavy duty operation. The pumps and motors
are a rugged design, but precision manufactured.

Pumps are available in single section units or several sections can be combined into one unit. A wide
selection of mounting flanges and drive shafts are available to fit most applications. Pipe thread, "O" ring,
or split flange are available in both metric and SAE standards.

Metaris pumps and motors are manufactured under strict quality control systems which are monitored by
ISO 9001-2000 standards.

METARIS PUMP / MOTOR FEATURES


Sectional construction; Quality gear construction, high strength gray and ductile iron castings, repair
components available throughout the world and a wide range of configurations to suit most applications.

Multiple Pump Units; Several pump sections or piggyback units can be combined on a single drive, to
eliminate multiple power take-off drives.

Precision Matched Gears; All gear sets are designed, and machined from high alloy bar, surfaces are
precision finished and each gear set is matched for maximum efficiency. The 10 tooth construction gives
maximum output per centimeter width per revolution.

Bearings; Quality roller bearings are utilized on journals to reduce the wear caused from contamination
within the hydraulic system.

Bushing Pumps; Bushings are constructed from quality materials and Teflon coated for maximum wear life.

INTERCHANGEABILITY
Metaris hydraulic units are directly interchangeable with most other manufactures.

ALL MANUFACTURERS NAME SYMBOLS AND DESCRIPTIONS IN THIS DOCUMENT ARE FOR
REFERENCE PURPOSES ONLY. IT IS NOT IMPLIED THAT ANY PART LISTED IS THE PRODUCT
OF THESE MANUFACTURERS.

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 113 of 273


METARIS MH SERIES UNITS

HOW TO SPECIFY AND CODE


THIS CATALOG CONTAINS CODES FOR MOST WIDELY USED MODELS ONLY; OTHER ASSEMBLY CODES ARE
AVAILABLE FROM OUR SALES REPRESENTATIVES.

SINGLE UNITS / MULTIPLE UNITS


METARIS PUMPS AND MOTORS ARE AVAILABLE AS SINGLE UNITS OR MULTIPLE ASSEMBLIES THE FULL ASSEMBLY
CODE FOR THE FINISHED UNIT COMBINES INDIVIDUAL CODES FOR SHAFT END COVER, PORT END COVER, GEAR
HOUSING, AND DRIVE SHAFT. THE CODE IS PRECEDED BY THE LETTER “P” FOR PUMP OR “M” FOR MOTOR, AND THE
LETTER “A” , “B” , OR “C” FOR MODEL. NOTE THE EXAMPLE OF THE PROCEDURE.

SINGLE UNIT MULTIPLE UNIT


ASSEMBLY CODE MHM50A-842-BE-OL15-43 ASSEMBLY CODE MHP75B-178-BI-OK15-7-C-OK12-1

1 MOTOR M 1 PUMP P
2 SERIES 50 2 SERIES 75
3 MODEL A 3 MODEL B
4 SHAFT END COVER 842 4 SHAFT END COVER 178
5 PORT END COVER BE 5 PORT END COVER BI
6 GEAR HOUSING OL15 6 GEAR HOUSING OK15
7 DRIVE SHAFT 43 7 DRIVE SHAFT 7
8 BEARING CARRIER C
9 GEAR HOUSING OK12

MHM50 SINGLE MOTOR MHP75 MULTIPLE PUMP

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 114 of 273


IDENTIFYING METARIS HYDRAULIC PUMPS / MOTORS
1– LOOK AT THE UNIT FROM THE PORT END; SEE WHICH EXAMPLE IT MATCHES THE CLOSEST. INCLUDE THE SHAPE
2– MEASURE THE OVERALL WIDTH OF THE UNIT, THEN MATCH THE WIDTH TO THE CHART BESIDE THE PORT END COVER
3– NOTE: IDENTIFICATION SIZE MAY DIFFER WITH DIFFERENT PORTING

PORT END COVER


SERIES MH315 MH330 MH350 MH365

SIDE PORT WIDTH 4.25 6.68 7.12 7.38

UNPORTED WIDTH 4.00 4.81 5.75 6.25

SERIES MH37X MH75 MH76


WIDTH 5.12 6.13 6.13

SERIES MH15 MH20 MH25X MH30/31 MH50/51


WIDTH 4.38 4.5 4.94 4.81 4.94

SHAFT END COVER LOOK AT THE SHAFT END AND COMPARE IT TO THE VIEWS BELOW, SELECT THE SHAFT
TYPE OF YOUR UNIT.

SERIES MH30, MH31, MH50, MH51 MH25X, MH37X

NO RETAINER WITH OUTBOARD SCREW IN


OUTBOARD BEARING BEARING RETAINER

GEAR HOUSING
SERIES MH31 / MH51 / MH76 - THE ONLY WAY TO DETERMINE THIS SERIES IS TO DISASSEMBLE THE UNIT AND LOOK FOR DOWEL PINS

MH 20,25,30,31,50,51
HOUSING WIDTH 1.25 1.5 1.75 2 2.25 2.5 2.75 3
GEAR WIDTH 0.5 0.75 1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2 2.25
MH 37X,75,76
HOUSING WIDTH 1.5 1.75 2 2.25 2.5 2.75 3 4
GEAR WIDTH 0.5 0.75 1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2 3
MH 315
HOUSING WIDTH 0.9 1.15 1.4 1.65 1.9 2.15 2.4 N/A
GEAR WIDTH 0.5 0.75 1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2 N/A
MH 330
HOUSING WIDTH 1 1.5 1.75 2 2.25 2.5 N/A N/A
GEAR WIDTH 0.5 1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2 N/A N/A
MH 350
HOUSING WIDTH 1 1.5 1.75 2 2.25 2.5 2.75 3
GEAR WIDTH 0.5 1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2 2.25 2.5
MH 365
HOUSING WIDTH 1.5 1.75 2 2.25 2.5 2.75 3 N/A
GEAR WIDTH 1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2 2.25 2.5 N/A

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 115 of 273


WEIGHTS
SINGLE UNIT APPROXIMATE WEIGHT
Gear Width

Model Unit weight 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 1 3/4" 2" 2 1/4" 2 1/2" 2 3/4" 3"
MH15 Pounds 24 25 26 27.5 29 30.5 32.5 * * * *
MH20 Pounds 24 25 26 27.5 29 30.5 32.5 * * * *
MH25 Pounds 36 39 42 43.5 45 46.5 48 50 52 * *
MH30 / 31 Pounds 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 * 38.5 * *
MH37 Pounds 52 54 56 58 60 62 65 68 71 * 78
MH50 / 51 Pounds 37 40 43 44.5 46 47.5 49 51 53.5 * *
MH75 / 76 Pounds 67 70 72 74 76 79 82 85 88 * 92
MH 315 Pounds 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 * * * *
MH 330 Pounds * 34.8 36 37.3 38.5 39.8 41 42.3 43.5 * *
MH 350 Pounds * 49.5 51 52.5 54 55.5 57 58.5 60 * *
MH 365 Pounds * * 56 58.5 61 63.5 66 68.5 71 73.5 76
MHC 101 Pounds * * * * * * 67 * 69 * *
MHC 102 Pounds * * * * * * 68 * 70 * *
MHG 101 Pounds * 31 * * 35 * 38 * * * *
MHG 102 Pounds * 31 * * 35 * 38 * * * *

MULTIPLE UNIT APPROXIMATE WEIGHT


Gear Width
Model Unit weight 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 1 3/4" 2" 2 1/4" 2 1/2" 2 3/4" 3"
MH15 Pounds 21 22 23 24 25 26 28 * * * *
MH20 Pounds 21 22 23 24 25 26 28 * * * *
MH25 Pounds 28.5 30 31.5 33 34.5 36 37 41 44 * *
MH30 / 31 Pounds 23 24 26 27 28 30 31 * * * *
MH37 Pounds 43 45 47 50 53 56 59 62 65 * 68
MH50 / 51 Pounds 29.5 31 32.5 34 35.5 37 38 42 45 * *
MH75 / 76 Pounds 54 57 60 63 65 67 69 71 73.5 * 76
MH 315 Pounds 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 * * * *
MH 330 Pounds * 31.3 32.5 33.8 35 36.3 37.5 38.8 40 * *
MH 350 Pounds * 49.5 51 52.5 54 55.5 57 58.5 60 * *
MH 365 Pounds * * 56 58.5 61 63.5 66 68.5 71 73.5 76

For the total weight of a multiple unit add the weight from the column of the single unit and the multiple unit column.
( e.g. MH15 single unit 3/4” gear width is 25 pounds plus MH15 multiple unit 3/4” gear width is 22 pounds total weight is 47 pounds)

For total weight in kilograms divide total weight in pounds by 2.2 = weight in kilograms
(e.g. 47 pounds ÷ 2.2 = 21.36 kilograms)

PL Factor
Each section of a multiple unit should be regarded as a single unit with corresponding delivery and power input requirements. Since the entire input
horsepower is fed through a common drive shaft, the power delivered to or from the unit is limited by the physical strength of the shaft. This limit is
defined as a “PL” factor, “P” being the operating pressure and “L” being the summation of the total gear widths.

In multiple units the “PL” must be calculated for the first connecting shaft as well as the drive shaft.
Each style or type of shaft has a unique “PL” factor as noted in the table with the performance data.

Pressure X Total Gear Width = PL

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 116 of 273


DUMP PUMPS
Speed RPM RPM 3/4" 1 1/2" 2" 2 1/2"
MHG101 1800 GPM 9.5 21 29 -
1800 LPM 36 79.5 109.3
MHG102 1800 GPM 9.5 21 29 -
1800 LPM 36 79.5 109.3
MHC101 1800 GPM - - 39 48
1800 LPM 147 180.5
MHC102 1800 GPM - - 39 48
1800 LPM 147 180.5
Maximum RPM 2400
MH101G / 102G MH101G / 102G

Performance data shown are the average results based on series of tests of production units and not necessarily representative of any
one unit. Tests were run with oil viscosity 150 SUS at 100°F

MH102 .875 DIA.


13T SPLINE RETURN

4.00 [101.60] INLET

-20 2.75 [69.85]


1.63 [41.28] -25 3.25[82.55]

-20 {16.00 [406.40]}


-25 {16.50 [419.10]}

MH101
RETURN
1.00 [25.40]

INLET

0.25 [6.35]
-20 2.75 [69.85]
2.38 -25 3.25 [82.55]

-20 {15.50 [393.70]}


-25 {16.00 [406.40]}

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 117 of 273


MH20 SERIES CODING
1 20 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 6 7 10

1 PUMP / MOTOR REPEAT FOR TANDEM UNITS


MHP PUMP
MHM MOTOR

2 UNIT
A SINGLE UNIT
B TANDEM UNITS
C SINGLE OR TANDEM WITH A CONTINENTAL SHAFT

3 SHAFT END COVER


1 PUMP WITHOUT SHAFT BEARING CLOCKWISE ROTATION
2 PUMP WITHOUT SHAFT BEARING COUNTER CLOCKWISE ROTATION
3 PUMP WITHOUT SHAFT BEARING DOUBLE ROTATION
4 PUMP WITH SHAFT BEARING CLOCKWISE ROTATION
5 PUMP WITH SHAFT BEARING COUNTER CLOCKWISE ROTATION
6 PUMP WITH SHAFT BEARING DOUBLE ROTATION
8 MOTOR WITH SHAFT BEARING & 1/4" DRAIN PORT
9 MOTOR WITHOUT SHAFT BEARING & 1/4" DRAIN PORT

4 SHAFT END COVER


27 4 BOLT CLOVERLEAF MOUNT TYPE 2
42 S.A.E. 4 BOLT "B" MOUNT TYPE 1
46 S.A.E. 2 & 4 BOLT "B" MOUNT TYPE 1
94 S.A.E. 2 BOLT "A" MOUNT TYPE 1
96 S.A.E. 2 BOLT "B" MOUNT TYPE 2
97 S.A.E. 2 BOLT "B" MOUNT TYPE 1
5 PORT END COVER
CODES
"O" RING PORTS SINGLE TANDEM PORT SIZE A B
UNITS UNITS LEFT RIGHT A B

CE CY CI CY 3/4' NONE N/A 1.4


DE DY DI DY NONE 3/4' 1.4 N/A
FE FY FI FY 3/4' 3/4' 1.4 1.4
GE GY GI GY 1" 3/4' 1.4 1.4
HE HY HI HY 3/4' 1" 1.4 1.4
JE JY JI JY 1" 1" 1.4 1.4
MA YO MU YO 1" NONE N/A 1.4
RA RO SU RO NONE 1" 1.4 N/A

N.P.T. PORTS BE BY BI BY NONE NONE N/A N/A


KE KY KI KY 3/4" NONE N/A 1.4
LE LY LI LY NONE 3/4" 1.4 N/A
ME MY MI MY 3/4" 3/4" 1.4 1.4
QU QQ QO QQ 1" 1" 1.4 1.4
ORIENTATION IS FROM THE
AI AI 3/4" 1" 1.4 1.4 SHAFT END
EI EI 1" 3/4" 1.4 1.4

WITH SUPPORT STUDS


WITHOUT SUPPORT STUDS

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 118 of 273


MH20 SERIES GEAR HOUSING PORTS

NOTE
* N.P.T. PORTING IS NOT RECOMMENDED FOR PRESSURES ABOVE 1500 P.S.I.
* Ports marked with a “X” are recommended porting, for all other porting please consult the factory
* SHADED CELLS ARE GOOD FOR MOTOR UNITS
* ORIENTATION IS VIEWED FROM THE SHAFT END

NPT.CODE PORT LEFT PORT RIGHT 05 07 10 12 15 17 20


AB NONE NONE X X X X X X X
IL 1/2" NONE X X X
IM NONE 1/2" X X X
IR 1/2" 1/2" X X
IC 3/4" NONE X X X X X X
ID NONE 3/4" X X X X X X
IF 3/4" 3/4" X X X X X X
IG 3/4" 1" X X X X X
IH 3/4" 1 1/4" X X
IJ 1" 3/4" X X X X X
IK 1 1/4" 3/4" X X
YC 1" NONE X X X X X
YD NONE 1" X X X X X
YF 1" 1" X X X X X
YG 1" 1 1/4" * X X X X
YH 1" 1 1/2" X X X
YJ 1 1/4" * 1" X X X
YK 1 1/2" 1" X X X
IA 1 1/4" * NONE X X X
IB NONE 1 1/4" * X X X
YL 1 1/4" 1 1/4" X X X

BSPP.CODE PORT LEFT PORT RIGHT 05 07 10 12 15 17 20


AB NONE NONE X X X X X X X
YN 3/4" NONE X X X X X X
YQ NONE 3/4" X X X X X X
YS 3/4" 3/4" X X X X
YT 3/4" 1" X X
YU 3/4" 1 1/4" X X
YV 1" 3/4" X X X X
YW 1 1/4" 3/4" X X
SL 1" NONE X X X X
RQ NONE 1" X X X X
MP 1" 1" X X X
VY 1" 1 1/4" * X X X
IX 1 1/4" * 1" X X X
NJ 1 1/4" * NONE X X
UI NONE 1 1/4" * X X
PF 1 1/4" 1 1/4" X

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 119 of 273


MH20 SERIES GEAR HOUSING PORTS
O.D TUBE. PORT LEFT PORT RIGHT 05 07 10 12 15 17 20
AB NONE NONE X X X X X X X
EC 3/4" NONE X X X X X X
ED NONE 3/4" X X X X X X
EF 3/4" 3/4" X X X X X X
EG 3/4" 1" X X X X X
EH 3/4" 1 1/4" X X X X
IN 3/4" 1 1/2" X X
EJ 1" 3/4" X X X X X
EK 1 1/4" 3/4" X X X X
IP 1 1/2" 3/4" X X
EZ 7/8" NONE X
EL 7/8" 1" X
EM 1" 7/8" X
AC 1" NONE X X X X X
AD NONE 1" X X X X X
AF 1" 1" X X X X
AG 1" 1 1/4" * X X X X
AH 1" 1 1/2" * X X
AJ 1 1/4" * 1" X X X X
AK 1 1/2" * 1" X X
AA 1 1/4" * NONE X X X X
AO NONE 1 1/4" * X X X X
AL 1 1/4" 1 1/4" X X X
AM 1 1/4" 1 1/2" * X X
AP 1 1/2" * 1 1/4" X X
AE 1 1/2" * NONE X X
AU NONE 1 1/2" * X X

SPLIT FLANGE PORT LEFT PORT RIGHT 05 07 10 12 15 17 20


AB NONE NONE X X X X X X X
UC 3/4" NONE X X X X X X
UD NONE 3/4" X X X X X X
UF 3/4" 3/4" X X X X X
UG 3/4" 1" X X X X X
UH 3/4" 1 1/4" X X X X
UJ 1" 3/4" X X X X X
UK 1 1/4" 3/4" X X X X
OC 1" NONE X X X X
OD NONE 1" X X X X
OF 1" 1" X X X X X
OG 1" 1 1/4" * X X X X
OH 1" 1 1/2" * X X
OJ 1 1/4" * 1" X X X X
OK 1 1/2" * 1" X X
OA 1 1/4" * NONE X X X X
OB NONE 1 1/4" * X X X X
OL 1 1/4" 1 1/4" X X X
OM 1 1/4" 1 1/2" * X X
OP 1 1/2" * 1 1/4" X X
OE 1 1/2" * NONE X X X
OU NONE 1 1/2" * X X X

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 120 of 273


MH20 SERIES GEAR HOUSING PORTS
METRIC S. F. PORT LEFT PORT RIGHT 05 07 10 12 15 17 20
AB NONE NONE X X X X X X X
VN 3/4" NONE X X X X
VQ NONE 3/4" X X X X
VS 3/4" 3/4" X X X X
VT 3/4" 1" X X X X
RV 1" 3/4" X X X X
RU 3/4" 1 1/4" X X X
RW 1 1/4" 3/4" X X X
UL 1" NONE X X X X X
UR NONE 1" X X X X X
UM 1" 1" X X X
VU 1" 1 1/4" * X X X X
UX 1 1/4" * 1" X X X X
HO 1" 1 1/2" * X X
VO 1 1/2" * 1" X X
NO 1 1/4" * NONE X X X
UO NONE 1 1/4" * X X X
PO 1 1/4" 1 1/4" X X X
QO 1 1/4" 1 1/2" * X X
SO 1 1/2" * 1 1/4" X X
UY 1 1/2" * NONE X X X
TO NONE 1 1/2" * X X X

METRIC STR. THD. PORT LEFT PORT RIGHT 05 07 10 12 15 17 20


AB NONE NONE X X X X X X X
EN 3/4" NONE X X X
TQ NONE 3/4" X X X
ES 3/4" 3/4" X X
ET 3/4" 1" X X
EV 1" 3/4" X X X X
NL 1" NONE X X X
ER NONE 1" X X X X X
CM 1" 1" X X
VE 1" 1 1/4" * X X X
EX 1 1/4" * 1" X X X
PA 1 1/4" 1 1/4" X X
QA 1 1/4" 1 1/2" * X
SA 1 1/2" * 1 1/4" X

YOUR SOURCE FOR HIGH QUALITY HYDRAULIC GEAR PRODUCT


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 121 of 273
MH20 SERIES CODING
7 GEAR SIZE MH 20
8 SHAFT TYPE
MH / 20 CU. IN. MAX. PSI
05 .99 3000 PSI CODE
07 1.48 3000 PSI 07 S.A.E. "C" 14 TOOTH SPLINE 1.250" dia — CONTINENTAL ONLY
10 1.97 3000 PSI 12 KEYED SHAFT .75" dia. X 1.56 KEY CONTINENTAL ONLY
12 2.46 3000 PSI 15 S.A.E. B KEYED .875" dia. WITH 5/8" -18 THREAD—CONTINENTAL ONLY
15 2.96 3000 PSI 25 S.A.E. "B" 13 TOOTH SPLINE .88" dia
17 3.45 2500 PSI 30 S.A.E. "B" KEYED .88" dia 1/4" X 3/8" X1" KEY
20 3.94 2500 PSI 43 S.A.E. B B KEYED 1" dia. 1/4" X 3/8" X 1 1/4" KEY
95 S.A.E. A 9 TOOTH SPLINE .62" dia.
65 S.A.E. "B" SPLINE TYPE 2
66 S.A.E. "B" KEYED TYPE 2
98 S.A.E. "BB" 15 TOOTH SPLINE 1" dia.

9 BEARING CARRIERS ORIENTATION IS FROM THE SHAFT END


N.P.T. S.A.E. SPLIT FLANGE
IN OUT CW CCW IN OUT CW CCW

NONE NONE C D 1" NONE LB BL


NONE NONE A J 1 1/4" NONE MB BM
1 1/2" NONE NB BN
1" NONE TB BT
1 1/4" NONE VB BV NONE 3/4" BR RB
1" 3/4" LR RL
1" 3/4" TX XT 1 1/4" 3/4" MR RM
1 1/4" 3/4" VX XV 1 1/2" 3/4" NR RN
1 1/4" 1" VZ ZV 1 1/4" 1" MS SM
1 1/2" 1" NS SN
TJ JT
1 1/4" 3/4" VJ JV 1" 3/4" LX XL
1 1/4" 1" VK KV 1 1/4" 3/4" MX XM
1 1/2" 1" KW . 1 1/2" 3/4" NX XN
1 1/4" 1" MZ ZM
1" 3/4" ZX XZ 1 1/2" 1" NZ ZN

1" 3/4" ZS SZ 1" 3/4" SR RS


S.A.E. ORING
1" 3/4" RZ ZR
1" NONE CB BC
1 1/4" NONE DB BD MOTORS ONLY
1 1/2" NONE FB BF IN OUT DUAL

NONE 3/4" JP NONE NONE B


1" 3/4" CJ JC
1 1/4" 3/4" DJ JD 1" 1" TT NPT
1 1/2" 3/4" FJ JF 1 1/4" 1 1/4" VV NPT
1 1/4" 1" DK KD 1" 1" CC SAE O RING
1 1/2" 1" FK KF 1 1/4" 1 1/4" BB SAE O RING
1 1/2" 1 1/2" FF SAE O RING
1" 3/4" CR RC 1" 1" LL SAE SPLIT FLANGE
1 1/4" 3/4" DR RD 1 1/4" 1 1/4" MM SAE SPLIT FLANGE
1 1/2" 3/4" FR RF 1 1/2" 1 1/2" NN SAE SPLIT FLANGE
1 1/4" 1" DS SD
1 1/2" 1" FS SF
10 CONNECTING SHAFT USE CODE #1 FOR ALL
1" 3/4" KJ JK MULTIPLE UNITS

1" 3/4" KX XK

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 122 of 273


WARRANTY POLICY AND PROCEDURES
WARRANTY
Metaris Inc. and Metaris Corp. hereinafter “Metaris”, warrants all of its product to be free from
defects in material and workmanship under normal operating conditions and proper application
in accordance with the specifications for operation as described by the manufacturer for the
period of twelve (12) months in service.

LIMITATIONS ON WARRANTY
This Warranty is expressly in lieu of any other warranties expressed or implied. Buyers sole and
exclusive remedy under this Warranty shall be limited to the repair, replacement or exchange of
warranted products at our option, F.O.B. our factory, or designated service center.

No special, incidental, consequential or other damage shall be recoverable. Metaris shall not be
liable for consequential damages or contingent liabilities including, but not limited to, loss of life,
personal injury, loss of crops, loss due to water or fire damage, loss of business income, down
time costs and trade or other commercial loss arising out of failure of the product. Metaris will in
no event be liable for any sum in excess of the price received by it for the product for which
liability is claimed or asserted.

No products shall be returned without prior authorization from Metaris. Buyers and their Agents
shall prepay all transportation charges for the return of such products to a Metaris location or
designated service center. There will be no acceptance of any charges for labor and/or parts
incidental to the removal or remounting of products repaired or replaced under Warranty.

The above Warranty does not cover conditions over which Metaris has no control, including,
without limitation, contamination, pressure in excess of recommended maximum, products
damaged or subject to accident abuse or misuse after shipment from our factory, products
altered or repaired by anyone other than Metaris personnel, authorized Metaris factory personnel
or persons so designated in writing by Metaris prior to commencement of said work.

A return goods authorization number must be obtained from Metaris or a Metaris authorized
service center, or a Metaris authorized agent prior to any products being returned for Warranty.

Our growing range of pumps and components also includes:

VANE PTO PISTON

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 123 of 273


This Page Left Blank

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 124 of 273


Appendix B
Hypro 9303 Pump

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 125 of 273


This Page Left Blank

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 126 of 273


Hypro Series 9303

Form L-1547
Rev. B

Original Instruction Manual


KEEP FOR FUTURE REFERENCE

9303C, 9303S, 9303C-SP & 9303S-SP


Cast Iron & Stainless Steel Series
Centrifugal Pumps
9303P
Polypropylene Series
Centrifugal Pumps

Pentair
375 5th Ave., New Brighton, MN 55112
Phone: (651)766-6300 -OR- 800-424-9776 Fax: 800-323-6496
www.hypropumps.com
EU Authorized Representative: EC QNET BV Hommerterweg 286
REP

6436 AM Amstenrade, The Netherlands


KvK Zuid-Limburg 14091511

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 127 of 273


Contents
EU Language .........................................................................................................................................................................3
Introduction.................................................................................................................................................................4
Description.....................................................................................................................................................4
Intended Uses............................................................................................................................................................4
Purpose of Manual....................................................................................................................................................4
Misuses...........................................................................................................................................................4
Pump Identification....................................................................................................................................................5
Pump Technical Data.................................................................................................................................................5
Fluid Pumping Applications.........................................................................................................................................12
Tools................................................................................................................................................................12
Lifting, Transport, and Intermediate Storage...............................................................................................................12
Assembly and Installation........................................................................................................................................................13
Assembly.........................................................................................................................................13
Installation......................................................................................................................................13
Plumbing Diagram.....................................................................................................................................................14
Commissioning, Start-Up, Operation, Shutdown...................................................................................................................16
Information.....................................................................................................................................16
Start-Up, Operation, Shutdown................................................................................................................................16
Maintenance and Servicing..................................................................................................................................................18
Information............................................................................................................................18
Disposal.................................................................................................................18
Cleaning............................................................................................................................18
Maintenance, Routine Servicing, and Inspection.....................................................................................................18
Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................19
Replacement Parts...................................................................................................................................................20
Declaration of Incorporation.................................................................................................................................................23
Warranty.................................................................................................................................................................... Last page

-2-

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 128 of 273


EU Languages
DO NOT attempt to install or operate your pump before reading the manual. Original copies of the manual for Hypro
pumps are provided in English. To find a copy in your native language, go to www.hypropumps.com.

Vor dem Ablesen des Handbuches versuchen Sie NICHT, Ihre Pumpe zu installieren. Originale des Handbuches fur
Hypro-Pumpen werden auf englisch zur Verfugung gestellt. Zu eine Kopie in Ihrer Muttersprache finden, zu
www.hypropumps.com zu gehen (German)

N’essayez pas d’installer votre pompe avant de lire le manuel. Des exemplaires originaux du manuel pour des pompes
de Hypro sont fournis en anglais. Pour trouver une copie dans votre langue maternelle pour aller a
www.hypropumps.com (French)

NON tentare di installare la vostra pompa prima di leggere il manuale. Esemplare originale del manuale per Hypro
pompe sono in inglese. Per trovare una copia nella vostra lingua andare a www.hypropumps.com (Italian)

Не пытайтесь установить ваш насос до чтения руководства. Оригинальные копии этого руководства для насосы
Hypro на английском языке. Найти копию на ваш родной язык перейти к www.hypropumps.com (Russian)

NO intente instalar su bomba antes de leer el manual. Copias originales del manual para Hypro se provee de bombas
en ingles. Para encontrar una copia en tu idioma nativo ir a www.hypropumps.com (Spanish)

NIE probować instalować pompy przed jej odczytaniem instrukcji. Oryginalne kopie instrukcji obsługi pomp Hypro są
dostarczane w języku angielskim. Aby uzyskać kopię w twoim ojczystym języku przejdź do www.hypropumps.com
(Polish)

Takmaya calışmayın okumadan once pompanın manuel. Orijinal kopyalarını Hypro pompaları icin Ingilizce olarak
sunulmuştur. Bir kopyasını bulmak icin yerel dil git www.hypropumps.com (Turkish)

Nao tente instalar a bomba antes de ler o manual. As copias originais dos manuais para Hypro bombas sao
fornecidos em Ingles. Para encontrar uma copia em sua lingua nativa ir para www.hypropumps.com (Portuguese)

VERGEET NIET uw pomp voor het lezen van het handboek. Exemplaren van de handleiding voor Hypro pompen zijn
beschikbaar in het Engels. Op zoek naar een exemplaar in uw eigen taal ga naar www.hypropumps.com (Dutch)

-3-

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 129 of 273


Introduction
Description
Hypro centrifugal pumps are designed for creating and boosting pressure in fluid circuits. The pump operates by taking
in fluid from the inlet port after which it is slung by the impeller and expelled through the outlet port. Construction features
include housings, impellers and seals which come in a variety of materials in order to be resistant to a range of chemicals.
Standard models of centrifugal pumps rotate clockwise, when looking at the shaft end of the pump.

Intended Uses
Hypro centrifugal pumps are intended for creating or boosting dynamic pressure in approved fluids. Hypro centrifugal
pumps should never be used to pump liquids above 140°F (60°C), or below 34°F (1°C). For pumps equipped with
hydraulic motors, the pump should not be run if the hydraulic oil temperature exceeds 135°F (57°C). Any uses outside
of those specified in this manual are considered misuses and are prohibited. Contact Hypro technical service with any
questions regarding specific acceptable uses.

Purpose of Manual
This manual provides instructions and requirements that must be met when installing, using and maintaining the
product(s) identified on the cover.

If the product is sold, the seller must pass this manual onto the new owner.

The following special attention notices are used to notify and advise the user of this product of procedures that may be
dangerous to the user or result in damage to the product.
ATTENTION
Attention is used to notify of installation, operation, or maintenance information that is important but not safety related.

This symbol is used to denote the presence of an electrical hazard that will result in personal injury, death or property
damage.

This symbol is used to denote the presence of a hazard that will result in personal injury, death or property damage.

California Proposition 65 Warning -- This product and related accessories contain chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Misuses
Hypro centrifugal pumps are designed to operate effectively within the specified speed, pressure and environmental
ranges. Going outside of these ranges will void the warranty and could cause damage to property, serious injury, or death.
• DO NOT run the pump faster than the maximum specified speed.
• DO NOT run the pump higher than the maximum specified pressure.
• DO NOT run pumps when the liquid has exceeded the maximum or minimum temperature limit (see Intended Uses).
• DO NOT pump non-approved liquids.
• DO NOT pump water or other liquids for human consumption.
• DO NOT operate any Hypro pump under the influence of drugs or alcohol.
• DO NOT run the pump dry.
• DO NOT run the pump with a higher than recommended voltage.
• DO NOT run the pump hydraulic motor higher than the specified RPM, pressure or flow.

-4-

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 130 of 273


Pump Identification
Hypro uses serialized labeling to enable users to precisely identify the pump’s manufacturing date.
Serial Number:
First and second digits: year (14 = 2014)
Third through fifth digits: consecutive day of the year the pump was manufactured.
Sixth through tenth digits: unique pump serial number.

Pump Technical Data


(All specifications and performance data are based on water as a carrier fluid.)
9303C(S) - HM1C, HM2C, HM3C, HM4C and HM5C
9303C(S) - HM1C-U, HM2C-U, HM3C-U, HM4C-U and HM5C-U
Pump Dimensions
Dim. Inch mm
A 8.37 212.6
B 7.78 197.6
HM1,2,3,4,5 C 4.19 106.4
D 3.81 96.8
E 3.06 77.7
HM1C F 11.07 281.2
HM2C F 10.82 274.8
HM3C F 11.57 293.9
HM4C F 10.92 277.4
HM5C F 11.19 284.2
G 4.63 117.6
HM1,2,3,4,5 H 5.25 133.4
I 2.63 66.8

Pump Dimensions
Dim. Inch mm
A 8.43 214.1
B 8.19 208.0
HM1,2,3,4,5 C 4.60 116.8
D 3.81 96.8
E 3.06 77.7
HM1C-U F 11.86 301.2
HM2C-U F 11.98 304.3
HM3C-U F 12.36 313.9
HM4C-U F 11.98 304.3
HM5C-U F 12.29 312.2
G 5.42 137.7
HM1,2,3,4,5 H 5.25 133.4
I 2.63 66.8

-5-

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 131 of 273


Pump Technical Data
Max Max Hyd.
Hydraulic Max Flow Pressure Flow
Max (PSI) Rate (GPM) (PSI) (GPM) Hydraulic Dry Mounting
Pump [BAR] [LPM] [BAR] [LPM] Ports Ports Weight Bolts
9303C-HM1C 114 [431.5] 130 [9] 13 [49.2]
9303C-HM2C 97 [367.2] 95 [6.5] 6 [22.7]
9303C-HM3C 125 [473.1] 98 [6.8] 24 [90.8]
9303C-HM4C 115 [435.3] 93 [6.4] 7 [26.5] 1-1/2" NPT 1/2” NPT
9303C-HM5C 3000 147 [556.5] 145 [10] 16 [60.6] Inlet Inlet 26lbs 2X 3/8"
9303S-HM1C [206.8] 114 [431.5] 130 [9] 13 [49.2] 1-1/4” NPT 3/4” NPT [11.8kg] OR M10
9303S-HM2C 97 [367.2] 95 [6.5] 6 [22.7] Outlet Outlet

9303S-HM3C 125 [473.1] 98 [6.8] 24 [90.8]


9303S-HM4C 115 [435.3] 93 [6.4] 7 [26.5]
9303S-HM5C 147 [556.5] 145 [10] 16 [60.6]
Max Max Hyd.
Hydraulic Max Flow Pressure Flow
Max (PSI) Rate (GPM) (PSI) (GPM) Hydraulic Dry Mounting
Pump [BAR] [LPM] [BAR] [LPM] Ports Ports Weight Bolts
9303C-HM1C-U 114 [431.5] 130 [9] 13 [49.2]
9303C-HM2C-U 97 [367.2] 95 [6.5] 6 [22.7]
9303C-HM3C-U 125 [473.1] 98 [6.8] 24 [90.8]
9303C-HM4C-U 115 [435.3] 93 [6.4] 7 [26.5] 1/2” NPT
9303C-HM5C-U 147 [556.5] 145 [10] 16 [60.6] 220 X 200
3000 Inlet 26lbs 2X 3/8"
Universal
9303S-HM1C-U [206.8] 114 [431.5] 130 [9] 13 [49.2] 3/4” NPT [11.8kg] OR M10
Flange
9303S-HM2C-U 97 [367.2] 95 [6.5] 6 [22.7] Outlet

9303S-HM3C-U 125 [473.1] 98 [6.8] 24 [90.8]


9303S-HM4C-U 115 [435.3] 93 [6.4] 7 [26.5]
9303S-HM5C-U 147 [556.5] 145 [10] 16 [60.6]

-6-

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 132 of 273


-7-

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 133 of 273


Pump Technical Data
(All specifications and performance data are based on water as a carrier fluid.)
9303C(S)-SP HM1C, HM2C, HM3C, HM4C and HM5C
Pump Dimensions
Dim. Inch mm
A 11.69 296.8
B 8.07 205.0
HM1,2,3,4,5 C 4.48 113.8
D 9.31 263.5
E 0.88 22.2
HM1C F 12.41 315.2
HM2C F 12.17 309.1
HM3C F 12.92 328.2
HM4C F 12.22 310.4
HM5C F 12.54 318.5
G 5.98 151.8
HM1,2,3,4,5 H 5.25 133.4
I 2.63 66.7

Max Max Hyd.


Hydraulic Max Flow Pressure Flow
Max (PSI) Rate (GPM) (PSI) (GPM) Hydraulic Dry Mounting
Pump [BAR] [LPM] [BAR] [LPM] Ports Ports Weight Bolts
9303C-HM1C-SP 122 [461.8] 130 [9] 13 [49.2]
9303C-HM2C-SP 104 [393.7] 80 [5.5] 6 [22.7]
9303C-HM3C-SP 120 [454.2] 95 [6.5] 24 [90.8]
1-1/2"
9303C-HM4C-SP 99 [374.8] 97 [6.7] 7 [26.5] NPT 1/2” NPT
9303C-HM5C-SP 3000 140 [530] 140 [9.7] 16 [60.6] Inlet Inlet 38lbs 3/8" OR
9303S-HM1C-SP [206.8] 114 [431.5] 130 [9] 13 [49.2] 1-1/4” 3/4” NPT [17.3kg] M10
9303S-HM2C-SP 97 [367.2] 95 [6.5] 6 [22.7] NPT Outlet
Outlet
9303S-HM3C-SP 125 [473.1] 98 [6.8] 24 [90.8]
9303S-HM4C-SP 115 [435.3] 93 [6.4] 7 [26.5]
9303S-HM5C-SP 147 [556.5] 145 [10] 16 [60.6]

-8-

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 134 of 273


Pump Technical Data

-9-

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 135 of 273


Pump Identification
Hypro uses serialized labeling to enable users to precisely identify the pump’s manufacturing date.
Serial Number:
First and second digits: year (14 = 2014)
Third through fifth digits: consecutive day of the year the pump was manufactured.
Sixth through tenth digits: unique pump serial number.

Pump Technical Data


(All specifications and performance data are based on water as a carrier fluid.)
9303P - HM1C, HM2C, HM3C, HM4C, HM5C
Pump Dimensions
Dim. Inch mm
A 8.75 222.2
B 8.33 211.7
HM1,2,3,4,5 C 4.12 104.6
D 4.44 112.7
E 3.06 77.7
HM1 F 10.97 278.6
HM2 F 10.72 272.3
HM3 F 10.47 291.3
HM4 F 10.77 273.6
HM5 F 10.10 256.5
G 4.56 115.9
HM1,2,3,4,5 H 3.00 76.2
I 1.50 38.1

Pump Technical Data


Max Max Hyd.
Hydraulic Max Flow Pressure Flow
Max (PSI) Rate (GPM) (PSI) (GPM) Hydraulic Dry Mounting
Pump [BAR] [LPM] [BAR] [LPM] Ports Ports Weight Bolts
9303P-HM1C 110 [416.4] 130 [8.9] 13 [49.2]
9303P-HM2C 82 [310.4] 95 [6.5] 6 [22.7] 1-1/2” NPT 1/2” NPT
3000 Inlet Inlet 21lbs 4X 3/8"
9303P-HM3C 110 [416.4] 93 [9.4] 24 [90.8]
[206.8] 1-1/4” NPT 3/4” NPT [935kg] OR M10
9303P-HM4C 82 [310.4] 84 [5.8] 7 [26.5] Outlet Outlet
9303P-HM5C 113 [427.7] 120 [8.2] 16 [60.5]

- 10 -

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 136 of 273


- 11 -

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 137 of 273


Fluid Pumping Applications
Pump Materials Compatibility
Impeller Pump Housing Seal
Application
Cast Silicon
Nylon Polypropylene GTX Stainless Polypropylene Ceramic
Iron Carbide
Weed Control Chemicals X X X X X X X X
Insect Control X X X X X X X X
Brush Control X X X X X X X X
Pest Control Chemicals
X X X X X X X X
and Fumigants
Liquid Fertilizers X X X X X X X
Powdered Fertilizers X X X X X X X X
Fluid Transfer X X X X X X X X
Acids X X X X
Table 1
Flammable liquids, sewage, and potable water should never be pumped through a Hypro pump.

Tools
The Hypro centrifugal pumps and mounting assemblies are designed with Imperial (inch) bolts, however, there are many
metric (mm) sizes which will work with these mounts. In most cases, an adjustable spanner wrench can also be used.

Lifting, Transport, and Intermediate Storage


Packaging Descriptions and Unpacking Instructions
• Hypro centrifugal pumps are shipped in cardboard boxes for safe transporting.
• When pumps are shipped in large quantities, they may be put on a pallet to allow for easy storage, lifting and
handling.
• Before lifting any pump or pallet, determine the weight of the item by looking at the attached packing slips to establish
what lifting equipment should be used.
• Before installing the pump, determine if all the components are present and undamaged. If the pump is missing
components, contact customer service immediately.
• Once the pump is unpacked, dispose of the packaging in a manner compliant with local and national regulations.
Lifting Instructions
• Before attempting to lift a Hypro pump, ensure that the surrounding working area is free of hazards which could cause
injury or damage to property.
• During lifting operations, any personnel not involved in the lift should not enter the working area.
• If lifting hooks, rope or chains are being used for a lift, they must be free of damage and be rated to carry 150% of the
weight of the load to be lifted.
• Always wear steel-toed shoes and cut-resistant gloves when attempting to lift.
• When lifting and carrying, always keep the pump close to your body. (See Figure 1)
• When starting the lift, bend your knees and keep your back straight. (See Figure 1) Tightening the stomach muscles
will help keep your back straight.
• During the lift, use your legs to do the work. Never use your back and make sure your legs are at least shoulder-width
apart. (See Figure 1)

- 12 -

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 138 of 273


Figure 1

Transport
• All Hypro pumps are capable of being transported by air, sea, rail or motor vehicle. When the pump is shipped, ensure
that the pump is moved in accordance with local and national laws and is properly secured to prevent unwanted
movement which could cause damage to person or property. Prior to shipping, all fluids should be removed from the
pump.
Storage
• New pumps in their boxes can be stored several years as long as the port plugs are not removed. Once the plugs
have been removed, if the pump is not to be used for an extended period of time (i.e. more than 30 days), the pump
must be winterized as described in the Cleaning section of this manual.

Assembly and Installation


Assembly
• This pump comes completely assembled.

Installation
Before attempting to install your Hypro centrifugal pump it is imperative to read and understand the following:
• Installation of a Hypro pump should only be performed by a technician having the knowledge and skills necessary
to install the pump without the risk of property damage or injury.
• When handling Hypro pumps, one should wear steel-toed shoes and protective gloves in order to protect the feet
in the event the pump is dropped and protect the hands from any sharp surfaces on the pump or chemicals.
• Pumping systems must be installed in accordance with Hypro installation instructions. Failure to do so will void
your warranty and could cause damage to property, serious personal injury, or death
• It is the installer’s responsibility to conduct electrical tests in accordance with EN60204-1:2006/A1:2009, or its
superseding standard, on finished pump assemblies.
• All connections to electrical components must be number, symbol, or color-coded generally as recommended by
EN60204-1:2006/A1:2009, or its superseding standard.
• Installers must provide hydraulic components that are capable of withstanding maximum source pressure.
• The working pressure must be controlled by a pressure relief valve that is adjusted to operate at a maximum
pressure of the hydraulic motor.
• If a rigid plumbing system is to be used on a Hypro centrifugal pump, the system must be properly aligned with the
inlet and outlet ports.

- 13 -

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 139 of 273


• The working pressure in the hydraulics system must be controlled by a pressure relief valve that is adjusted to
operate at 10% of the maximum system pressure.
• When installing, adjusting or removing a Hypro centrifugal pump, ensure that there are no objects which can fall
on the installer and make certain that all machinery to which the pump is to be attached is turned off.
• Pumps must be installed in a location where they are accessible for any necessary maintenance.
• When hydraulic power is used, the system should contain a quick disconnect coupling that can be disconnected
to isolate the pump.

Standard Mounting
• In order to prevent injury or damage to property, all Hypro pumps should be properly mounted to a solid base where
there is no danger of the pump falling or breaking loose. All Hypro pumps come with mounting holes which allow
bolts to be put into the pump so it can be secured to a sturdy base. When mounting your Hypro centrifugal pump, be
sure to use bolts and nuts which are compatible with any chemicals that may come into contact with them as well as
choosing the correct grade of bolt based on the pump weight and any expected loads. Pumps should be mounted
as close to the liquid source as possible. Non self-priming pumps must be mounted below the liquid level to function
properly.

Pump Plumbing
• To achieve maximum pump performance, the outlet port on the pump should be pointing straight up, and pump
inlet and outlet lines should be at least the same size as their respective port. Pump plumbing must be capable of
withstanding the maximum suction, and pressure, generated by the pump and should have as few restrictions as
possible.
• For best priming results, the upper most vent plug can be removed and a vent line can be installed. This line prevents
air lock and allows the pump to prime itself by bleeding off trapped air.

Ref.
No. Description
1 Tank Lid
2 Vent Line
3 Jet Agitator
4 Shut-off Ball Valves
5 Centrifugal Pump
6 Spray Control Console
7 Centrifugal Pump Control
8 Manifold Boom Valve
9 Flowmeter
10 Jet Turret Nozzle Body

- 14 -

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 140 of 273


Hydraulic Installation
• When installing the hydraulic motor into the tractor or sprayer’s hydraulic system, make sure that no dirt or liquid gets
into the hydraulic motor.

KEEP ALL HYDRAULIC CONNECTIONS CLEAN.


• Ensure return line is connected to low pressure return port on the tractor recommended for hydraulic motors, the ports
are identified on the motor casting. Hydraulic supply lines should be at least the same size as the hydraulic motor port
or larger.
• Standard models come equipped with check valve port adapters that should not be removed.

Hooking up the motor in the wrong direction will damage the hydraulic seal.

• Installing and Removing Metering Orifice


Attention: For pumps equipped with HM2 and HM4 motors, the metering orifice should not be used if the hydraulic
system is a load-sensing (flow-compensated) closed center system, or if it is an open center system with a maximum
flow of 8 gpm [30.28 lpm] for HM2C or 10 gpm [37.85 lpm] for HM4C.

• Correct orifice size is determined by system performance. Start by installing the smallest orifice in the adapter con-
nected to the pressure port. Once the orifice is installed, test system performance and if system performance is low,
install the next largest orifice. Continue this process until pump performance reaches the desired level, or no orifices
are installed in the adapter.

1) Ensure hydraulic system is off.


2) Remove the adapter from the motor using a 1-1/16’’ wrench. Make sure the O-ring is on the metering orifice
before installing into port adapter.
3) The orifice is removed or installed in the port adapter by tapping either in or out of the adapter.
a) To remove, tap the orifice out from the small end of the adapter.
b) To install, tap the orifice in from the large end of the adapter. The orifice is seated when a snap sound
is heard.
For HM2 and HM4 motors, the pressure differential across the motor should never exceed 2500 PSI [172.4 BAR].

Control Systems

• All pump systems with electric or hydraulic power sources are required to have a control system which meets all local
and national standards.
• For more detail on a typical system installation, see preceding subsections of the “Assembly and Installation” section
of this manual.

- 15 -

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 141 of 273


Commissioning, Start-Up, Operation, Shutdown
Before attempting to start your pump, the following must be understood and followed to ensure safe operation.

Information
• When running Hypro centrifugal pumps, it is essential that operators use hearing protection as the sound levels
can reach levels of 80 decibels.
• When handling Hypro pumps, one should wear steel-toed shoes and protective gloves in order to protect the feet
in the event the pump is dropped and protect the hands from any sharp surfaces on the pump or chemicals.
• Only authorized operators having the knowledge and skill necessary to safely use a Hypro pump, or any
equipment the pump is connected to, may run the pump.
• When spraying manually, it is recommended that chemical-resistant face masks and clothing be worn to prevent
any chemicals from coming into contact with the skin or being inhaled.
• When spraying manually, always spray upwind of yourself as long as the sprayed chemical will not drift into the
vicinity of other people.
• When installing, adjusting or removing a Hypro centrifugal pump, ensure that there are no objects which can fall
on the installer and make certain that all machinery to which the pump is to be attached is turned off.
• Hypro centrifugal pumps should only be used on tractors or tow-behind spray platforms which have electrically
conductive tires in order to reduce the risk of electrocution.
• Never operate a Hypro centrifugal pump outside while there is a chance of getting struck by lightning.
• Never leave electrical wires or plumbing components where they can be a tripping hazard or become entangled
in a moving component. Ideally, electrical cables, hoses, pipes and fittings should be routed overhead. In the event
electrical wiring must be routed over the ground, operators are required to use rubber ramps if they cross a gangway.
• Hypro centrifugal pumps should not be used if the ambient light is below 200lux.
Only use approved chemicals in your pump. For a complete list of approved chemicals, see the “Fluid
Pumping Applications” section. Failure to follow this warning will void your warranty and could lead to property
damage, serious injury or death.

Start-up, Operation, Shutdown


Before Starting the Pump
• Ensure all unnecessary personnel are clear of the area.
• For initial setup and test of your system, it is recommended to start with clean water instead of chemicals, and confirm
the system and plumbing connections are leak free.
• Ensure that there is fluid in the source tank or supply line. Do not run dry.
• Check line strainer for debris or clogs. Remove any found.
• Check all plumbing connections to make sure they are tight.
• Check power source and connections.
• Check that all valves and regulators are set to the desired setting and are functioning properly.
• Ensure all hoses are properly positioned and are not damaged in any way.

Priming the Pump


To help prime the pump, keep the inlet or suction line as short as possible with a minimum of bends, elbows and kinks.
Make sure all connections are tight and do not leak air. Non self-priming pumps must have the inlet line and pump flooded
with liquid before starting the pump. For self-priming models, the front chamber should be filled with liquid before starting.

- 16 -

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 142 of 273


Starting, Operation and Shutdown of the Pump (Hydraulic)
Open Center Systems - All Models
Adjusting Centrifugal Pump Output
ATTENTION HM1C, HM3C & HM5C motors have bypass screw fully closed from the factory. HM2C & HM4C motors have
bypass screw set at 1-1/2 turns from fully closed from the factory.
1. Open the bypass adjustment screw 2-1/2 turns from fully closed and secure it in place with the bypass jam nut.
2. Start the tractor. Leave the directional valve in the neutral position and allow hydraulic oil to circulate for approximately
10 to 15 minutes or until adequately warmed.
3. Prime the centrifugal pump with all valves open. (See Priming the Pump.)
4. Refer to sprayer manufacturer’s manual to set spraying pressure and flow. To change the flow or pressure generated
by the pump, turn the bypass screw on the hydraulic motor. Be sure to secure the bypass jam nut after any
adjustment.
5. To shutdown, return directional valve to neutral and allow the pump to come to a gradual stop.
When bypassing hydraulic oil, a large amount of heat can be generated which will damage the tractor’s hydraulic
system. Be sure to monitor the oil temp when bypassing hydraulic oil.

Closed Center (Pressure-Compensated)


Adjusting Centrifugal Pump Output
1. Open the bypass adjusting screw in the hydraulic motor three (3) turns and secure it in place with the bypass jam nut.
2. Start the tractor and allow hydraulic oil to circulate for approximately 10 to 15 minutes or until adequately warmed
3. Close and lock down the bypass adjusting screw in the hydraulic motor.
4. Prime the centrifugal pump with all valves open. (See Priming the Pump.)
5. Refer to sprayer manufacturer’s manual to set spraying pressure and flow. To change the flow or pressure generated
by the pump, slowly adjust tractor’s flow control valve.
6. To shutdown, the pump move the selector for the tractor spool valve to the float position and allow the pump to come
to a gradual stop.
If the pump is not brought to a gradual stop, the sudden change in hydraulic pressure and pump RPM could cause
damage to the pump’s drive system.

Closed Center (Load-Sensing) Systems


Adjusting Centrifugal Pump Output
1. Close and lock down the bypass adjusting screw in the hydraulic motor.
2. Set the tractor hydraulic flow control valve for minimum hydraulic oil flow to the remote outlet (Tortoise position).
3. Start the tractor and allow the hydraulic oil to circulate for approximately 10 to 15 minutes or until adequately warmed.
4. Prime the centrifugal pump with all valves open. (See Priming the Pump.)
5. Refer to sprayer manufacturer’s manual to set spraying pressure and flow. To change the flow or pressure generated
by the pump, slowly adjust tractor’s flow control valve.
6. To shutdown the pump, move the selector for the tractor spool valve to the float position and allow the pump to come
to a gradual stop.
If the pump is not brought to a gradual stop, the sudden change in hydraulic pressure and pump RPM could cause
damage to the pump’s drive system.

- 17 -

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 143 of 273


Maintenance and Servicing
Information
• All maintenance should be done when machinery is stationary and has been isolated from its energy sources. It
is dangerous to perform maintenance while machinery is still connected to its power source. Machinery should be
isolated from its electrical, hydraulic or gas engine power source.
• Be sure to release all pressure from the system before performing any sort of maintenance on a Hypro pump.
• DO NOT perform service or maintenance to the pump, or attached components, until the pump unit is below
109°F(43°C).
• The lubrication of this pump unit has been done at the factory prior to shipping.
• When handling Hypro pumps, one should wear steel-toed shoes and protective gloves in order to protect the feet
in the event the pump is dropped and protect the hands from any sharp surfaces on the pump or chemicals. If the
pump is being repaired while the pump is in service, eye protection should also be worn.
Any hazardous liquids should be disposed of in a manner which complies with local and national regulations. Never dump
fluids onto the ground.

Disposal
When disposing of a Hypro pump, be sure to remove all fluids from the pump before scrapping. These fluids should be
disposed of in a manner which complies with local and national regulations. Never dump fluids onto the ground. Once the
pump is free of all fluids, it may be scrapped in accordance with local and national laws.

Cleaning
Your pump will last longer and give best performance when properly taken care of. Proper pump care depends on the
liquid being pumped and when the pump will be used again. After each use, flush pump with a neutralizing solution for the
liquid just pumped. Follow with a clean water rinse. This is especially important for corrosive chemicals. It is good practice
to clean the pump after each use to prevent deposits from forming and damaging the pump. For infrequent use and before
long periods of storage, drain pump thoroughly. Open any drain plugs, remove suction hose from liquid, and blow pump
dry with air. An antifreeze/rust inhibitor should be injected into the pump before both ports are plugged and the pump is
stored. Plug all ports to keep out air until pump is used again.

Maintenance, Routine Servicing, and Inspection


PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST
Check Daily Weekly
Water Leaks X
Plumbing X

• Each system’s maintenance cycle will be exclusive. If system performance decreases, check immediately.
• Duty cycle, temperature, quality, type of fluid being pumped, and inlet feed conditions all affect the life of spray boom
assemblies and service cycle.

- 18 -

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 144 of 273


Troubleshooting
Before attempting to service your pump, be sure that it is disconnected from all energy sources.

Symptom Probable Cause(s) Corrective Action


Pump does not prime Leak in suction line Check hose and fittings for leaks and
correct
Obstruction in suction line Inspect hose for obstructions and
remove
Suction hose stuck to tank Cut a notch or “V” in end of suction
hose
Clogged strainer Check strainer and clean regularly
Low discharge Pump rotates incorrectly Correct rotation of pump
Blocked suction hose Inspect suction hose and repair as
necessary
Pump worn Repair pump
Undersized suction line See Installation
Pump will not turn Impeller plugged Inspect and clear obstruction
Hydraulic system overheating Hydraulic bypass needs adjustment See Installation
Insufficient hydraulic hose size See Installation
Table 2

- 19 -

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 145 of 273


Replacement Parts
The following drawings show the pumps and their replacement parts. Only genuine replacement parts should be used.
Failure to follow this warning can result in damage to property, serious injury or death. If the pump malfunctions or
is defective, it should be sent back to Hypro for service.
9303C(S)-HM1C, 2, 3, 4,
5 & -U and 9303C(S)-SP-
HM1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Adapter Kit No. 3430-0187 (HM2
and HM4 Modes Only) Contains
one each:
No. 3373-0020 (Size #1)
No. 3373-0021 (Size #2)
No. 3373-0022 (Size #3)
No. 1720-0108 Adapter O-ring and
No. 1720-0105 Orifice O-ring
SP Chamber Kit No. 3430-0480SP
Contains: One chamber with wear
ring. (Ref. 2) one o-ring (Ref. 5),
one drain vent plug (Ref. 1) and
one vent plug (Ref. 1A).
NOTE: When ordering parts, give QUAN- Parts Kit No. 3430-0748
TITY, PART NUMBER, DESCRIPTION, Contains: One each ball bearing
and COMPLETE MODEL NUMBER. (Ref. 13), motor shaft seal (Ref.
Reference numbers are used ONLY to 16), thread seal gasket (Ref. 35),
identify parts in the drawing and are NOT two cartridge o-rings (Ref.15), and
to be used as order numbers. washer (Ref 36); two each motor
housing o-rings (Ref. 22), and port
Silicon Carbide Seal Kit Repair Parts Kit No. 3430-0332
adapter o-rings (Ref. 30 & 32).
No. 3430-0589 Contains:
Contains: One mechanical seal (Ref. 7), one Hydraulic Motor Part Nos.
2500-0081C (HM1C Models)
Mechanical seal (Ref .7) and o-ring o-ring (Ref. 5) and one rubber 2500-0082C (HM2C Models)
(Ref. 5). gasket (Ref. 6). 2500-0083C (HM3C Models)
2500-0084C (HM4C Models)
2500-0085C (HM5C Models)
Ref. No. Qty. Req’d. Part No. Description Ref. No. Qty. Req’d. Part No. Description
1 4 2406-0007 Drain/Vent Plug (9303C) 23 1 1600-0045 Dowel Pin (HM2C / HM4C)
1 4 2406-0016 Drain/Vent Plug (9303S) 23 1 1600-0044 Dowel Pin (HM1C/HM5C)
1A 4 2406-0007 Drain/Vent Plug 23 1 1600-0052 Dowel Pin (HM3C)
1B 4 2406-0001 Vent Plug 24 1 1600-0042 Dowel Pin (HM2C / HM4C)
2 1 0150-9000C Pump Casing (Model 9303C) 24 1 1600-0037 Dowel Pin (HM1C/HM5C)
2 1 0150-9000S Pump Casing (Model 9303S) 24 1 1600-0068 Dowel Pin (HM3C)
2A 1 0153-9000C Pump Casing (Universal Flange Model C-U) 25 1 3900-0022 Gerotor (HM1C)
2A 1 0153-9000S Pump Casing (Universal Flange Model S-U) 25 1 3900-0023 Gerotor (HM2C)
2B 1 0150-9070CM Pump Casing 25 1 3900-0024 Gerotor (HM3C)
3 1 3430-0825 Impeller Nut (9303C) 25 1 3900-0025 Gerotor (HM4C)
3 1 3430-0825 Impeller Nut (9303S) 25 1 3900-0048 Gerotor (HM5C)
4 1 0401-9100P Impeller (Nylon Std. 9303C) 26 1 0701-2500C1 Gerotor Housing (HM2C Models) 1/4” wide
4 1 0402-9100P Impeller (Polypropylene Optional) (Std 9303S) 26 1 0700-2500C1 Gerotor Housing (HM1C Models) 1/2” wide
5 1 1720-0083 O-ring 26 1 0703-2500C1 Gerotor Housing (HM4C Models) 5/16” wide
6 1 1700-0100 Gasket 26 1 0702-2500C1 Gerotor Housing (HM3C Models) 1” wide
7 1 2120-0009 Mechanical Seal (Viton/Ceramic) (Std 9303C) 26 1 0704-2500C1 Gerotor Housing (HM5C Models) 5/8” wide
7 1 3430-0589 Mechanical Seal (Silicon Carbide) (Std 9303S) 27 1 0254-2500C2 Motor End Plate (includes needle bearing)
8 1 0750-9300C Mounting Flange (9303C) 28 4 2270-0039 Washer
8 1 0756-9300S Mounting Flange (9303S) 29 4 2220-0045 Cap Screw (HM2C / HM4C Models)
9 4 2210-0020 Hex Head Cap Screw (9303C) 29 4 2220-0021 Cap Screw (HM1C Models)
9 4 2210-0125 Hex Head Cap Screw (9303S) 29 4 2220-0044 Cap Screw (HM3C Models)
10 1 1410-0056 Slinger Ring 29 4 2220-0032 Cap Screw (HM5C Models)
11 1 1810-0014 Snap Ring 30 1 1720-0108 O-ring
12 1 1820-0013 Retaining Ring 31 1 3360-0021A Pressure Port Adapter (includes o-ring)
13 1 2000-0010 Ball Bearing 32 1 1720-0262 O-ring
14 1 1410-0131 Cartridge, Front 33 1 3320-0051A Tank Port Adapter (includes o-ring)
15 2 1720-0268 O-ring 34 1 3220-0029 Bypass Adjusting Screw
16 1 3430-0748 Lip Seal 35 1 1700-0047 Gasket
17 1 1410-0130 Seal Spacer 36 1 2270-0027 Washer
18 1 2029-0014 Thrust Bearing Assembly 37 1 2250-0038 Lock Nut
19 1 3430-0850 Shaft (HM2C/HM4C) 38 1 1610-0032 Roll Pin (HM2C / HM4C)
19 1 3430-0852 Shaft (HM1C/HM5C) 38 1 1610-0031 Roll Pin (HM1C / HM5C)
19 1 3430-0855 Shaft (HM3C) 38 1 1610-0055 Roll Pin (HM3C)
20 1 0150-2500C Motor Body (includes needle bearing) 39 1 1810-0026 Snap Ring
21 4 2210-0005 Hex Head Cap Screw 40 1 1610-0012 Woodruff Key (9303C)
22 2 1720-0110 O-ring 40 1 04432 Woodruff Key (9303S)

- 20 -

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 146 of 273


Replacement Parts
The following drawings show the pumps and their replacement parts. Only genuine replacement parts should be used.
Failure to follow this warning can result in damage to property, serious injury or death. If the pump malfunctions or
is defective, it should be sent back to Hypro for service.
9303P

Hydraulic Motor Part Nos.


2500-0181C (HM1C Models)
2500-0182C (HM2C Models)
2500-0183C (HM3C Models)
2500-0184C (HM4C Models)
2500-0185C (HM5C Models)
Adapter Kit No. 3430-0187
(HM2 and HM4 Models Only):
Contains one each:
No. 3360-0021 Pressure Port Adapter
No. 3373-0020 (Size #1)
No. 3373-0021 (Size #2)
No. 3373-0022 (Size #3)
No. 1720-0108 Adapter O-ring
No. 1720-0105 Orifice O-ring (Qty. 3).
NOTE: When ordering parts, give Parts Kit No. 3430-0748
QUANTITY, PART NUMBER, Contains: One each ball bearing (Ref. 22),
Repair Parts Kit No. 3430-0445 DESCRIPTION, and COMPLETE motor shaft seal (Ref. 25), thread seal
Silicon Seal Parts Kit # 3430-0593 Contains: One o-ring (Ref. 13), MODEL NUMBER. Reference number gasket (Ref. 47), two cartridge o-rings (Ref.
Contains one each: one rubber gasket (Ref. 11), one are used ONLY to identify part in the 24) and washer (Ref. 48); two each motor
mechanical seal (Ref. 12) and o-ring mechanical seal (Ref. 12), one gasket drawing and are NOT to be used as housing o-rings (Ref. 34), and port adapter
(Ref. 13). (Ref. 8) and one washer (Ref. 9). order numbers. o-rings (Ref. 42 & 45).

1 4 2210-0087 Hex Head Cap Screw 31 1 1610-0031 Roll Pin (HM1C / HM5C)
2 2 2210-0016 Hex Head Cap Screw (Base Only) 31 1 1610-0055 Roll Pin (HM3C)
3 6 2270-0041 Washer 32 1 0150-2500C Motor Body (includes needle bearing)
4 4 2406-0020 Pipe Plug 33 4 2210-0021 Hex Head Cap Screw
5 1 0700-9000P Pump Casing 34 2 1720-0110 O-ring
6 1 2250-0052 Impeller Nut 35 1 1600-0045 Dowel Pin (HM2C / HM4C)
7 1 2250-0051 Jam Nut 35 1 1600-0044 Dowel Pin (HM1C/HM5C)
8 1 1700-0097 Gasket (Viton) 35 1 1600-0052 Dowel Pin (HM3C)
9 1 2270-0057 Washer 36 1 1600-0068 Dowel Pin (HM3C)
10 1 0402-9100P Impeller 36 1 1600-0042 Dowel Pin (HM2C/ HM4C)
11 1 1700-0100 Rubber Gasket 36 1 1600-0037 Dowel Pin (HM1C/HM5C)
12 1 2120-0009 Mechanical Seal (Viton/Ceramic) (Std 9303P) 37 1 3900-0022 Gerotor (HM1C)
12 1 3430-0593 Mechanical Seal (Silicon Carbide) (Optional) 37 1 3900-0023 Gerotor (HM2C)
13 1 1721-0083 O-ring 37 1 3900-0024 Gerotor (HM3C)
14 1 0750-9300P Cover 37 1 3900-0025 Gerotor (HM4C)
15 1 2210-0088 Screw 37 1 3900-0048 Gerotor (HM5C)
16 1 0750-9006C Intermediate Flange 38 1 0701-2500C1 Gerotor Housing (HM2C Models) 1/4” wide
17 1 1510-0063 Base Plate 38 1 0700-2500C1 Gerotor Housing (HM1C Models) 1/2” wide
18 2 2250-0008 Hex Nut 38 1 0703-2500C1 Gerotor Housing (HM4C Models) 5/16” wide
19 1 1410-0056 Slinger Ring 38 1 0702-2500C1 Gerotor Housing (HM3C Models) 1” wide
20 1 1810-0014 Snap Ring 38 1 0704-2500C1 Gerotor Housing (HM5C Models) 5/8” wide
21 1 1820-0013 Retaining Ring 39 1 0254-2500C2 Motor End Plate (includes needle bearing)
22 1 2000-0010 Ball Bearing 40 4 2270-0039 Washer
23 1 1410-0131 Cartridge, Front 41 4 2220-0032 Cap Screw (HM5C Models)
24 2 1720-0268 O-ring 41 4 2220-0045 Cap Screw (HM2C / HM4C Models)
25 1 2104-0010 Lip Seal 41 4 2220-0021 Cap Screw (HM1C Models)
26 1 1410-0130 Seal Spacer 41 4 2220-0044 Cap Screw (HM3C Models)
27 1 2029-0014 Thrust Bearing Assembly 42 1 1720-0108 O-ring
28 1 1610-0042 Woodruff Key (9303P all except HM3C) 43 1 3360-0021A Pressure Port Adapter (includes o-ring)
28A 1 1610-0053 Square Key (9303P-HM3C Only) 44 1 3320-0051A Tank Port Adapter (includes o-ring)
29 1 3430-0850 Shaft (HM2C/HM4C) 45 1 1720-0262 O-ring
29 1 3430-0852 Shaft (HM1C/HM5C) 46 1 3220-0029 Bypass Adjusting Screw
29 1 3430-0855 Shaft (HM3C) 47 1 1700-0047 Gasket
30 1 1810-0026 Snap Ring 48 1 2270-0027 Washer
31 1 1610-0032 Roll Pin (HM2C / HM4C) 49 1 2250-0038 Lock Nut

- 21 -

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 147 of 273


Notes

- 22 -

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 148 of 273


EC Declaration of Incorporation

Manufacturer’s Name: Pentair Flow Technologies, LLC


Manufacturer’s Address: 375 Fifth Avenue NW,
New Brighton, MN 55112, USA

Declare that the partially complete machinery described below conforms to applicable health and safety requirements of
Parts 1 of Annex I of Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC. This partly completed machinery must not be put into service until
the equipment into which it is to be incorporated has been declared in conformity with the provisions of this directive.
Confidential technical documentation has been compiled as described in Annex VII Part B of Machinery Directive 2006/42/
EC and is available to European national authorities on written request. If a request is received, documentation will be
transmitted either electronically or by post. Clauses 1.1.4, 1.1.7, 1.1.8 Section 1.2, Clauses 1.3.5, 1.3.6, 1.3.7, 1.3.8.1, 1.3.8.2,
1.3.9, 1.4.1, 1.4.2.1, 1.4.2.2, 1.4.2.3, 1.4.3, 1.5.2, 1.5.7, 1.5.12, 1.5.14, 1.5.16, 1.6.2, 1.7.1.1, 1.7.1.2, 1.7.2, and 1.7.4.2 are clauses of
Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC that have not been met, but could be applicable and must be addressed during installation by
a third party.

Description: PENTAIR Pump

Type: Roller Pumps


Series Numbers: 1502, 1700, 4001, 4101, 6500, 7560, 7700

Type: Centrifugal Pumps


Series Numbers: 1442P, 9000, 9202, 9203, 9205, 9206, 9208, 9262, 9263, 9253, 9302, 9303,
9305, 9306, 9307, 9308

The following standards have either been referred to or been complied with in part or in full as relevant:

ENISO 12100 Machinery Safety General principles for design - Risk assessment and risk reduction
EN809-1998 + A1 2009 Machinery Safety Pumps and pump units for liquids - Common safety requirements
EN ISO 13732-1 Machinery Safety Ergonomics of the thermal environment
EN ISO 3744:2010 Acoustics Determination of sound power levels and sound energy levels of noise sources using
sound pressure
EN ISO 11202/A1 1997 Machinery Safety Noise emitted by machinery and equipment
EN 12162:2001+A1:2009 Machinery Safety Liquid pumps - Safety requirements - Procedure for hydrostatic testing
EN ISO 4254-6:2009 Machinery Safety Sprayers and liquid fertilizer distributors
97-68-EC + 2010/26/EU Gas Emission Non-road gas emissions

Name .……………...…………………………………………… Position …..……………………….…………

Signature …………………………………………..……………. Date …..……..……………………….………

Place of Signing……………………………………………………………………………………………………….........

QNET BV
EC REP Hommerterweg 286
6436 AM Amstenrade
The Netherlands

- 23 -

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 149 of 273


Limited Warranty on Hypro/Shurflo Agricultural Pumps & Accessories

Hypro/Shurflo (hereafter, “Hypro”) agricultural products are warranted to be free of defects in material and workmanship under
normal use for the time periods listed below, with proof of purchase.

- Pumps: one (1) year from the date of manufacture, or one (1) year of use. This limited warranty will not
exceed two (2) years, in any event.
- Accessories: ninety (90) days of use.

This limited warranty will not apply to products that were improperly installed, misapplied, damaged, altered, or incompatible with
fluids or components not manufactured by Hypro. All warranty considerations are governed by Hypro’s written return policy.

Hypro’s obligation under this limited warranty policy is limited to the repair or replacement of the product. All returns will be tested
per Hypro’s factory criteria. Products found not defective (under the terms of this limited warranty) are subject to charges paid by the return-
ee for the testing and packaging of “tested good” non-warranty returns.

No credit or labor allowances will be given for products returned as defective. Warranty replacement will be shipped on a freight allowed
basis. Hypro reserves the right to choose the method of transportation.

This limited warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, and no other person is authorized to give any other
warranty or assume obligation or liability on Hypro’s behalf. Hypro shall not be liable for any labor, damage or other expense, nor
shall Hypro be liable for any indirect, incidental or consequential damages of any kind incurred by the reason of the use or sale of
any defective product. This limited warranty covers agricultural products distributed within the United States of America. Other world market
areas should consult with the actual distributor for any deviation from this document.

Return Procedures
All products must be flushed of any chemical (ref. OSHA section 1910.1200 (d) (e) (f) (g) (h)) and hazardous chemicals must be labeled/
tagged before being shipped* to Hypro for service or warranty consideration. Hypro reserves the right to request a Material Safety Data
Sheet from the returnee for any pump/product it deems necessary. Hypro reserves the right to “disposition as scrap” products returned
which contain unknown fluids. Hypro reserves the right to charge the returnee for any and all costs incurred for chemical testing, and proper
disposal of components containing unknown fluids. Hypro requests this in order to protect the environment and personnel from the hazards
of handling unknown fluids.

Be prepared to give Hypro full details of the problem, including the model number, date of purchase, and from whom you purchased your
product. Hypro may request additional information, and may require a sketch to illustrate the problem.

Contact Hypro Service Department at 800-468-3428 to receive a Return Merchandise Authorization number (RMA#).
Returns are to be shipped with the RMA number clearly marked on the outside of the package. Hypro shall not be liable for freight damage
incurred during shipping. Please package all returns carefully. All products returned for warranty work should be sent shipping charges
prepaid to:

HYPRO / PENTAIR
Attention: Service Department
375 Fifth Avenue NW
New Brighton, MN 55112

For technical or application assistance, call the Hypro Technical/Application number: 800-445-8360, or send an email to: technical@
hypropumps.com. To obtain service or warranty assistance, call the Hypro Service and Warranty number: 800-468-3428; or send a fax
to the Hypro Service and Warranty FAX: 651-766-6618.

*Carriers, including U.S.P.S., airlines, UPS, ground freight, etc., require specific identification of any hazardous material being shipped. Failure to do so may
result in a substantial fine and/or prison term. Check with your shipping company for specific instructions.

Visit www.hypropumps.com/register today to register


your product and stay up-to-date on new products and
promotional offers.

The following information is required:


Model # _______________ Serial # _______________

Hypro (10/15)
Printed in USA

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 150 of 273


Appendix C
CompuSpread CS550 Spreader
Controller

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 151 of 273


This Page Left Blank

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 152 of 273


CS 550/150RC
Spreader Joystick Controller Operator Manual

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 153 of 273


2/18

Table of
of Contents
Contents
1 Panel Controls 3
2 Program Screen Layout 4
3 Screen Controls 5
3.1 Pause 5
3.2 Blast 5
3.3 Reverse 5
3.4 Change Solid Material 6
3.5 Change Prewet Material 6
3.6 Manual Gate Adjustment 6
3.7 Error Messages 7
4 Symbol Actions 7
4.1 Error Log/Diagnostic – Gear Symbol 7
4.2 Unloading – UNLOAD Symbol 8
4.3 Data Retrieval/Clear Trip Summary – USB Symbol 9
4.4 Brightness/Volume Adjustment – Backlight Symbol 9
4.5 Manual Hydraulic Gate Adjustment – Cylinder Symbol 10
4.6 Programming Mode – Lock Symbol 10
5 Joystick Control 11
5.1 Button Status 11
5.2 Joystick Status 11
5.3 Joystick Screen 11
6 Anti-
Anti-ice Mode 12
7 Pattern Mode 13
8 Air Gate Mode 13
9 Liquid+ Mode 14
10 Cross Conveyor Mode 14
11 Spinner Reverse Mode 15
12 Error Codes 15
13 Warning 18

Bosch Rexroth Canada Corp. reserves the right to revise this information at any time and for
any reason and reserves the right to make changes at any time, without notice or obligation,
to any of the information contained in this piece of literature.
Please check for updates at: www.boschrexroth.ca/compu-spread

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.22.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 154 of 273


3/18

1 Panel Controls
Turn knobs clockwise to increase.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.22.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 155 of 273


4/18

2 Program Screen Layout

SPNR SALT - - LIQUID1


Spinner Label Solid Name Liquid Name
Spread Width % Gate Mode/Solid Rate Liquid Rate
Spinner Setpoint Gate Position/Conv Set. Liquid Setpoint
Spinner Mode Conveyor Mode Liquid Mode
Pause Button Blast Button Reverse Button

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.22.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 156 of 273


5/18

3 Screen Controls
3.1 Pause
Press the Pause button to pause, and press again to resume spreading.

3.2 Blast
Press the Blast button to increase the spreading output, and press again to resume
regular rate.

3.3 Reverse
Press and hold the Reverse button to change the direction of the Auger (an optional
feature to dislodge obstructions). Release the button to resume spreading.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.22.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 157 of 273


6/18

3.4 Change Solid Material


Press the oval button with “SALT- -” text on it to adjust material type. (Note: Vehicle
must be stationary) Use the left and right arrows to change.

Use the Left and Right to


adjust

Press the oval button


again to confirm and save
the selection.

3.5 Change Liquid Material


Press the oval button with the “LIQUID1” text to adjust the material type. (Note:
vehicle must be stationary)

Use the Left and Right


arrows to adjust.

Press the oval button again


to confirm and save the
selection.

3.6 Manual Gate Adjustment


For Manual Gate operation ONLY.

Press the Gate Position Number to select the gate adjustment mode.

Use the up and down


arrows to adjust.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.22.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 158 of 273


7/18

Press the Gate Position again to verify the selection.

3.7 Error Messages


During the operation when an error occurs, a message will appear in the centre of
the screen. Tap anywhere on the message to clear the window.

4 Symbol Actions
All symbols on the right of the screen require a press and hold for >1 seconds.

Err/Diag Unload USB Bright/Vol Cylinder Lock

4.1 Error Log/Diagnostic


Log/Diagnostic

When the vehicle is stationary press the ‘Gear’


‘Gear’ symbol to display most recent error
messages. If a hydraulic pressure&temperature sensor is connected both readings
will be displayed on the bottom right of the screen.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.22.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 159 of 273


8/18

A program key is required to clear the error log; hold the button for >5 seconds.

When a vehicle is moving press the ‘Gear’ symbol to display the real-time status of
spreading.

4.2 UNLOAD
UNLOADING
ADING

Press the ‘Unload’


Unload’ symbol to enter into unload mode. (Note: The vehicle must be
stationary.)

Turn the dials until the


desired speed is achieved.
Press the symbol again

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.22.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 160 of 273


9/18

and to exit unload mode. Moving the vehicle will suspend the unload process. It will
automatically resume when the truck is stopped again.

4.3 Data Retrieval/Clear


Retrieval/Clear Trip Summary

With a ‘LOG DATA KEY’ inserted


Press the ‘USB
USB’’ symbol to transfer the log data.

With a ‘PROGRAMMING KEY’ inserted


USB’ symbol to transfer the log data and the parameter. “Transfer
Press the ‘USB’
Successful” will appear on the screen momentarily when it finishes.

Without a key inserted


Press the ‘USB’ symbol to clear trip summary.

Note: ‘PROGRAMMING KEY’ is for programming and data log. ‘DATA LOG KEY’ is for
log data only.

4.4 Brightness and Volume Adjustment

Press the ‘Bright/Vol’


Bright/Vol’ symbol to enter into adjustment mode, volume or bright. Press
again to toggle the other mode.
Use the up and down arrows to adjust (only adjustable with vehicle stationary).

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.22.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 161 of 273


10/18

To adjust volume, the “Vol Adj” needs to be checked on setup user screen.

4.5 Manual Hydraulic Gate Adjustment

For hydraulic gate operation ONLY.


Press the ‘Cylinder’
Cylinder’ symbol to select the gate adjustment mode. Use the up and
down arrows to adjust.

Press the ‘Cylinder’


Cylinder’
symbol again to end the
gate adjustment.

4.6 Programming Mode

Press the ‘Lock’ symbol to enter into programming mode. (Note: A valid
‘PROGRAMMING KEY’ must be inserted into the USB port.)

See Calibration Manual for


programming details.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.22.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 162 of 273


11/18

5 Joystick Control
For systems equipped with Joystick Option ONLY.

5.1 Button Status


The oval buttons represent the push buttons on the handle of the joystick. When a
joystick button is pushed, the proper mode is illuminated in red.

5.2 Joystick Status


The arrow symbols represent the direction the joystick handle is being deflected.
The mode status is displayed in the top right of both spreader and joystick screens.

5.3 Joystick Screen


Available only when equipped with a CS-150 Armrest Console.

Screen flips when the Deadman Trigger is pressed. When the trigger is released, the
screen reverts back to the spreader layout.

Note: The joystick will only operate while the Deadman Trigger is pulled.
The default spreader or joystick screen is selectable on USER setup screen.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.22.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 163 of 273


12/18

6 Anti-ice Mode
6.1 3 Boom

Boom Selection
Press the oval buttons to select the desired boom. Pause and Blast operate the
same as a Granular Spreader.

Rate Selection
Use the dial on the right to select the desired liquid flow rate. The reverse button is
de-activated.

6.2 Single Boom


Use the upper right arrows to select the desired liquid flow rate.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.22.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 164 of 273


13/18

7 Pattern Mode
Use the controls on the top right of the screen to control the Chute.
Select left or right with the circular buttons.

Note: To calibrate the centre position you would need to click on the symmetry
reading while a program key is inserted.

8 Air Gate Mode


Use the controls on the top right of the screen to control the Air Gate.
When vehicle is stationary click on left or right button to toggle between two
materials, and automatically set the operation gate to the calibrated gate for the
material selected.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.22.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 165 of 273


14/18

9 Liquid + Mode
This screen is only available when the LIQUID+ mode is selected in the programming
mode. (See Calibration Manual for details.)

Boom Selection
Press the red dial buttons to select the desired Boom. Pause and Blast operate the
same as a Granular Spreader.

Rate Selection
Use the upper right arrows to select the desired liquid flow rate.

Solid and Pre-


Pre-wet
All standard spreader functions perform as defined earlier in the manual

10 Cross Conveyor Mode


Use the controls on the top right of the screen to control the Cross Conveyors.

Select left or right with the circular buttons. Use the up and down arrows to adjust
the speed.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.22.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 166 of 273


15/18

11 Spinner Reverse Mode


Click the “R” button of spinner knob on the screen to control spinner forward or
reverse.
When the “R” button is pressed the controller would ramp down the spinner from
the speed selected and ramp up to the opposite direction to the speed selected.

12 Error Codes

Error Messages # Suggested Solution


ERROR BLAST TOO LONG 1 Turn off blast, reset timer

ERROR DEICE BLST TOO LONG 2 Turn off blast, reset timer

ERROR OVERSPEED 3 Slow down, reset max speed

ERROR SPIN PROP 4 Check cables, replace coil

ERROR CONV PROP 5 Check cables, replace coil

ERROR CROSS1 PROP 6 Check cables, replace coil

ERROR CROSS2 PROP 7 Check cables, replace coil

ERROR NO MATL DETECT 8 Load material, check sensor

ERROR NO LIQ DETECT 9 Load material, check sensor

ERROR NO GROUNDSPEED 10 Check cable/sensor

ERROR NO CONVEYOR 11 Check cable/sensor

ERROR NO LIQUID 12 Check cable/sensor

ERROR NO DEICE 13 Check cable/sensor

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.22.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 167 of 273


16/18

Warning Messages # Suggested Solution


UNLOAD NOT ALLOWED 21 Vehicle needs to be stationary

BB3 SYSTEM ERROR 22 Check if RCE present, Reboot

RC COMMUNICATION ERROR 23 Comm failure between display and RC

RCE COMMUNICATION ERROR 24 Comm failure between RC and RCE

JOY 1 COMMUNICATION ERROR 25 Comm failure between RC and Joystick 1

JOY 2 COMMUNICATION ERROR 26 Comm failure between RC and Joystick 2

NO GATE SENSOR 27 Check gate sensor, cable break

GATE POSITION ZERO 28 Gate closed in READBACK mode

NO GROUND SPEED SIMULATION 29 Speed Simulation mode stopped

UNDER APPLICATION-SPINNER 30 Spinner not able to reach desired RPM

UNDER APPLICATION-CONVEYOR 31 Rate or speed too high, incorrect calibration

UNDER APPLICATION-PREWET 32 Rate or speed too high, incorrect calibration

UNDER APPLICATION-ANTI-ICING 33 Rate or speed too high, incorrect calibration

OVER APPLICATION-COVEYOR 34 Min null or gate too high,

OVER APPLICATION-PREWET 35 Min null too high, rate too low

OVER APPLICATION-ANTI-ICING 36 Min null too high, rate too low

CALIB:GND SPD PULSES TOO LOW 37 Too few or no pulses, recalibrate

SPINNER MAX RPM TOO LOW 38 Bad or no sensor

CONVEYOR MAX RPM TOO LOW 39 Bad or no sensor

PREWET MAX HZ TOO LOW 40 Too few pulses, or sensor failed

ANTI_ICING MAX HZ TOO LOW 41 Too few pulses, or sensor failed

WRONG SPINNER CONTROL MODE 42 Auto null not allowed for MANUAL mode

SPARE 43 Not used

WRONG PREWET CONTROL MODE 44 Auto-null or volume calibration not allowed

WRONG ANTI-ICING CONTROL MODE 45 Check Anti-icing or Cross-Conv modes

WRONG CROSS-CONVEYOR MODE 46 Check Cross-Conv mode setting

WT/REV TOO LOW 47 Check conveyor sensor, and calibrate again

WT/REV TOO HIGH 48 Check conveyor sensor, and calibrate again

PREWET PULSES/GAL TOO LOW 49 Check prewet sensor, and calibrate again

PREWET PULSES/GAL TOO HIGH 50 Check prewet sensor, and calibrate again

ANTI-ICING PULSES/GAL TOO LOW 51 Check anti-icing sensor, and calibrate again

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.22.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 168 of 273


17/18

Warning Messages # Suggested Solution


ANTI-ICING PULSES/GAL TOO HIGH 52 Check anti-icing sensor, and recalibrate

SPNR WIDTH AT 0 RPM TOO LOW 53 Check spinner sensor, and recalibrate

SPNR WIDTH PER RPM TOO LOW 54 Check max width, and recalibrate

GATE MOVEMENT TOO LOW 55 Range too small (Low -> High)

GATE ZERO IN MANUAL 56 Manual Gate set to 0

GATE AT CALIBRATION TOO LOW 57 Calibrated gate needs tob a non-zero value

SPINNER SENSOR PULSES TOO LOW 58 Spinner sensor pulses 0 or too low

CONV SENSOR PULSES TOO LOW 59 Conv sensor pulses 0 or too low

SPINNER OUTPUT RANGE TOO LOW 60 Range between spn Min and Max too small

CONV OUTPUT RANGE TOO LOW 61 Range between Conv Min and Max too small

CROS CONV1 OUTPUT RANGE LOW 62 Range between Cros1 Min and Max too small

CROS CONV2 OUTPUT RANGE LOW 63 Range between Cros1 Min and Max too small

PREWET OUTPUT RANGE LOW 64 Range between prewet Min and Max too small

ANTI-ICING OUTPUT RANGE LOW 65 Range for anti-icing Min to Max too small

JOY1 OUTPUT RANGE TOO LOW 66 Range between Joy1 Min and Max too small

JOY2 OUTPUT RANGE TOO LOW 67 Range between Joy2 Min and Max too small

REQUIRED CONV RPM TOO HIGH 68 Setpoints too high, incorrect wt/rev

REQUIRED PREWET FLOW TOO HIGH 69 Setpoints too high, incorrect pulses/gallon

REQUIRED ANTI-ICING FLOW TOO HI 70 Setpoints too high, incorrect pulses/gallon

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.22.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 169 of 273


18/18

13 Warning
This glass LCD touch screen display has been extensively tested and validated
against its intended use. This glass could crack and break if the display is dropped
on to a hard surface or receives a substantial impact. If the glass chips or cracks,
discontinue use and contact Bosch Rexroth Canada to have it replaced - do not
touch or attempt to remove the broken glass. Any misuse/abuse causing damage,
whether intended or not, will become the sole responsibility of the owner/buyer
which will render the warranty of this product, void.

Notes:

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.22.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 170 of 273


CS 550/150RC
Spreader And Joystick Controller Calibration Manual

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 171 of 273


2/32

Table of
of Contents
Contents
1 Programming Mode 3
2 Program Screen Layout 4
3 Changing Fields – Data Entry 5
4 Initial Set-
Set-up 6
5 Ground Speed Calibration 7
6 Valve Nulling – Conveyor/Spinner/Prewet/Norm 8
6.1 Auto Nulling 8
6.2 Manual Nulling 8
7 Gate Calibration 9
8 Material Calibration 10
9 Material Catch Test 12
10 Load Parameters 13
11 Advanced Features 14
12 WiFi and GPS tracking 15
13 Optional Modes and Operation 17
13.1 Pattern/Chute Mode 17
13.2 Air Gate Mode 17
13.3 Liquid+ Mode 18
13.4 Cross Conveyor 19
13.5 Spinner Reverse Mode 21
13.6 Solid reduction for Prewet 21
13.7 Dedicated 3 Boom Anti-ice 22
14 Optional Modes and Operation - 550 Lite 23
14.1 Liquid – 1 Boom Anti-icing 23
13.2 Liquid – dedicated 3 Boom Anti-icing 24
15 Error Codes 25
16 Joystick Calibration 30
16.2 Joystick Solenoid Nulling 30
16.2 Joystick Emergency (Panic Button) – If Equipped 30
17 Advanced Joystick Set
Set-
et-up 31
17.1 Power Float 31
17.2 Function Labels 31
18 Warning 31

Bosch Rexroth Canada Corp. reserves the right to revise this information at any time and for
any reason and reserves the right to make changes at any time, without notice or obligation,
to any of the information contained in this piece of literature.
Please check for updates at: www.boschrexroth.ca/compu-spread

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 172 of 273


3/32

1 Programming Mode
All symbols on the right of the screen require a tap and hold for >1 second.

Press symbol to enter into programming mode.


Note: A valid PROGRAMMING USB key must be on the USB port. The
PROGRAMMING USB key is for programming and log data, and the LOG DATA USB
key will only retrieve data.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 173 of 273


4/32

2 Program Screen Layout


Note: Due to the compact nature of these screens, the use of a selection tool like a
pen or stylus is recommended.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 174 of 273


5/32

3 Changing Fields
Note: Due to the compact nature of these screens, the use of a selection tool like a
pen or stylus is recommended.

When selecting an item without a pull-down selection menu, a keypad is required.


This keypad is used to enter text or numeric values. The example shown is “TRUCK-
ID”.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 175 of 273


6/32

4 Initial Set-up
1. Set the units to imperial (LBS/Mile) or metric (Kg/Km).
2. Set the TRUCK ID.
3. Set the REGION NAME.
4. Set the DRIVER ID (optional), 4 driver IDs allowed.
5. Set the type of Temperature Sensor (optional).
6. Set the Options – see Advanced Features on page 13 (optional).
7. Set the items that the user has access to(optional).
8. Set Blast Timer, 0-timer disabled (optional).
9. Set Temp Compensation % based on 3 degree change (optional).
10. Set the vehicle speed alarm (optional).
11. Select AVL or GPS tracking (optional).
12. Set WIFI/TIME/STYLUS (if required).

The default error configuration values will work well for most applications, no
changes required.

Note: Save only applies to changes to Date/Time+WiFi+Stylus.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 176 of 273


7/32

5 Ground Speed Calibration


1. Select symbol to enter into the ground speed calibration screen.
2. Choose which calibration option best suits your situation.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen.

4. Press Start when the vehicle speed is steady.

5. Once calibration is complete, verify the speed by driving the vehicle through its
speed range and verify if the controller matches the speedometer.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 177 of 273


8/32

6 Valve Nulling – Conv/Spn/Prewet/Norm


1. Select symbol to enter into the calibration screen.
2. Select the appropriate mode:
Spinner – Manual (default)
Conveyor/Auger
Conveyor/Auger – Manual, Open, Closed (default)
Prewet – Fixed, V-Flow (default), Manual, Manual-SPD, Return Oil
Gate – Manual (default), Read Back, Auto
Norm (Anti-icing) – Off (default), 1 Boom, 3 Boom, Manual
3. Set correct conveyor sensor pulses/rev if Closed loop is selected.
4. Ensure the hopper is empty, and the truck is safe to operate.
5. Start the engine to achieve adequate oil flow.

If the Closed loop mode is selected for Conveyor


Conveyor, V-Flow or Return Oil mode for
Prewet,
Prewet, and 1Boom or 3 Boom is selected for Norm
Norm (Anti-icing) it is strongly
recommended to run Auto Null.
Null For manual mode please skip 6.1 and follow 6.2
Manual Nulling instructions.

6.1 Auto Nulling


1. Press “Auto Null” to start. This procedure automatically run the system, and set
both “Min” and “Max” for the motor selected, Auger, Prewet, Anti-icing, etc...).
2. Note: This feature can only be used with motors with speed or flow feedback
(i.e. Conveyor/ Auger, Prewet, Anti-icing, etc.).

6.2 Manual Nulling


1. Press “Min” value field to enter into edit mode.
2. Use up and down arrows to adjust speed so that the motor just begins to turn
3. Press the “Min” value field again to end the edit mode and accept the value
4. Do the same for “Max” except adjust the motor to a safe maximum speed or
until the RRM readout stops to increase.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 178 of 273


9/32

5. Forward Gain and Blast settings can also be adjusted


6. Repeat this procedure for all the vehicle motors (i.e. Conveyor/Auger, Spinner,
Prewet, Anti-icing, etc.).

7 Gate Calibration
1. Select the Gate tab.
2. Select the appropriate mode of gate operation :
Manual - Enter max height, and no further calibration required.
Read back - Press High value field to enter into edit mode
- Move the gate to its max opening
- Press High value field to end mode and save the value
- Repeat the same procedure for Low value
Note: A Gate Position Sensor required for Read back.
Auto - Press High value field to enter into edit mode
- Press Up/Down buttons to move the gate to max opening
- Press High value field to end mode and save the value
- Repeat the same procedure for Low value
Note: A gate cylinder with a position Sensor required.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 179 of 273


10/32

8 Material Calibration

Solid Material Calibration

1. Tap on the “valve” symbol and CONV tab to enter into solid calibration.
2. Place an adequate catch container under the spreader discharge chute.
3. Make sure that sufficient material in the hopper and the system is safe to run.
4. Set gate position:
Manual - Change CAL Gate to match actual gate position
Readback - Adjust actual gate position on the truck
Auto - Set to a desired gate position for calibration
5. Press “CALIBRATION” button to proceed.
6. Turn CONV Knob and/or SPN Knob to run.
7. Stop when desired amount is reached.
8. Weigh the material and enter the value.
9. Press “CALIBRATION” Button to complete.

Note: Press “STOP” button to stop the process anytime during calibration.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 180 of 273


11/32

Liquid Material Calibration (Prewet or Anti-


Anti-icing)

1. Tap on symbol and PREWET/NORM


PREWET/NORM tab to enter into liquid
calibration.
2. Place an adequate catch container under the liquid spray nozzle.
3. Make sure that sufficient liquid in the tank and the system is safe to run.
4. Press “CALIBRATION” button to proceed.
5. Turn PREWET Knob to run.
6. Stop when desired amount is reached.
7. Measure the liquid volume and enter the value.
8. Press “CALIBRATION” Button to complete.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 181 of 273


12/32

9 Material Catch Test


1. Tap on symbol to enter into the material calibration screen.
2. Place an adequate catch container under the spreader discharge chute.
3. Press “CATCH TEST” button to start, and enter the desired rate, speed and
duration (seconds) using on-screen keypad.
4. Press “CATCH TEST” button to begin material dispensing (hydraulics must be
active).
5. When dispensing is stopped, weigh the material and enter the value.
6. Press “CATCH TEST” button again to end.
7. An appropriate weight per revolution will be calculated and displayed on the
bottom right of the screen.
8. Repeat this procedure for all solid materials (use the green left and right arrows
to select material types).
9. The individual rates can be adjusted by tapping the rate and editing the value
with the keypad.
10. These same procedures apply to pre-wet and liquid.

Note: The material names can be changed by tapping on the text “SALT - -” and
using the keypad to edit.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 182 of 273


13/32

10 Load Parameters
The operation requires an USB PROGRAM key. It allows end users to load
parameters from an existing file on the USB stick.

1. Ensure an USB PROGRAM key inserted


2. Tap on USB symbol.

3. Select a file to load from the popup file window.


4. Click on the “Select” or “Cancel” button to select or cancel.
Then the popup file window would close, and red “Load” text shows up on the
USB symbol if a file is selected.
5. Tap on the Door Symbol to exit to the operation mode.
6. Turn the unit off, and on again for the new parameter to take effect.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 183 of 273


14/32

11 Advanced Features
Tap on symbol to enter into the user calibration screen. This series of
drop-down menus allow the adjustment of special features of the 550 system.

System Reset – Press and hold the preset button for 5 seconds.
WARNING: All parameters will be reset to factory defaults.

Temperature Sensor
Sensors
s – Roadwatch, Surface Patrol
System Options – Normal, Pattern, Air Gate, Liquid+, Cross Conv
User Options – MATERIAL and or GATE (operators allowed to adjust
without a programming key).
Blast Timer – Blast turns off automatically when time out
Speed alarm – alarm will sound when the set speed is exceeded.
Temp Comp – Temp compensation, per three degree change

JoyScn – Operator screen defaults to joystick screen.


LmtRst – Dump limit warning disappears once acknowldged
GPS/AVL – GPS tracking, require a serial cable (R987376776) and a GPS receiver
Puck (R987380745), or AVL interface.
W/L – Prewet and Anti-icing operation interlock with an asymmetrical valve
L lvl – Use MAT change input as liquid level detection.
Fr – French version
Auger – Once checked the gate change is disabled
LastP – Remember the last knob positions at power up.
Dig – Disable remote Pause/Blast, and use them as digital inputs

VoiceOff – Turn off voice readout for spreader functions.


VolAdj – Allow operators to adjust volume without programming key

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 184 of 273


15/32

12 WiFi and GPS Tracking


If equipped with WiFi option make sure an internal or external antenna is connected
before setting it up. Similar to standard PC there are two parts that need to be set
up, Wireless Connection and Network Settings.

Wireless Connection: Setting up connection to a router/access point. This is very


similar to setting up a WiFi connection of a PC. A network profile needs to be set up
to allow a 550 controller to connect to the network. Appropriate security protection
is recommended for the router and the 550 controller.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 185 of 273


16/32

Network Setting:
Setting: A static IP Address needs to be assigned for the 550 PC WiFi
software to communication with a CS5550/150 unit.

GPS Tracking:
Tracking: For 550 controllers it is easy to enable the GPS tracking option by
simply connecting a GPS receiver to the display unit. Here are the part numbers for
the cable and the GPS receiver puck:
R987376776, 550 Serial cable for GPS and Temp sensor
R987380745, GPS receiver

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 186 of 273


17/32

13 Optional Modes and Operation


13.1 Pattern Mode - Chute Control
This mode requires a hydraulic valve and a hydraulic cylinder. It controls the
direction of a chute by moving the chute LEFT or RIGHT on the operator screen.

1. Select the Pattern mode under “Options” menu from USER screen.

2. Click ‘L’ and ‘R’ buttons on operator screen to move chute to the Middle position
3. Click on the value of ‘Chute-%’ to record the position with an USB PROGRAM key
inserted into USB port.

13.2 Air Gate Mode


This mode allows a two position gate control with an air cylinder for two
different materials, like SAND and SALT. It provides a digital output signal (0, 12V)
to toggle between two materials and two calibrated gate positions. When gate

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 187 of 273


18/32

position changes the 550 controller also automatically set the gate position to the
correct calibrated gate position for the material.

1. Select the Air Gate mode under “Options” menu from USER screen.
2. Click buttons on operator screen to turn on/off Air Gate.

13.3 Liquid+ Mode (Solid+Prewet+3 Boom Anti-ice)


This mode allows a 550 controller to run both Solid, Prewet and Anti-icing
operations simultaneously on a single screen.

1. Select the Liquid+ under “Options


Options”
Options menu from the USR screen.
2. Click on Valve icon and then click on LIQ+ tab, and select “3 BOOM”.
3. Set the min and max value as defined in the valve nulling procedure (on page 8).
4. Calibrate all Prewet and Anti-icing materials to be used.
5. Click L, C, R buttons on operator screen to turn on/off each boom.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 188 of 273


19/32

13.4 Cross Conveyor


This mode provides a proportional output and two digital outputs (Metric), and
or two proportional outputs (Imperial) to manually control a Left and a Right cross
conveyor.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 189 of 273


20/32

1. Select the Crs Conv under “Options” menu from the USER screen.
2. Click on Valve icon and then click on C CNV tab.
3. Set the min and max values as defined in the valve nulling procedure (page 8).
4. Select left/right cross conveyor, click up/down buttons to adjust speed.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 190 of 273


21/32

13.5 Spinner Reverse Mode


This mode allows end users to control a Spinner in either forward or reverse
direction by providing two proportional spinner outputs. When an operator click on
the R button to reverse the spinner direction the controller ramps down from the
current direction and ramps up to the opposite direction.

1. Select the Spn Rvs under “Options” menu from the USER screen.
2. System assume the same Min&Max for Spinner reverse output
3. Click ‘R’ button to select spinner forward or reverse operation

13.6 Solid Reduction for Pre-wet


This feature helps to save salt usage when prewet is turned on. End users are
able to define a percentage of salt rate reduction in material configuration.

1. Select the Prewet tab.


2. The pull-down menu for solid reduction percentage is in the bottom right of the
screen (i.e. 10%, 15%, 20%, 30%)

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 191 of 273


22/32

13.7 Dedicated 3 Boom Anti-ice


This mode sets the 550 controller to a dedicated Anti-ice controller. Since this
mode selection may require some IO re-initialization the controller needs to be
turned off, and turned back on.

1. Select Norm under the “Options” menu from the USER screen.
2. Click on Valve icon and then click on NORM icon, and select “3 BOOM”.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 192 of 273


23/32

14 Optional Modes & Operation– 550Lite


The 550 Lite is a cost effective version of standard 550. It supports the following
optional functions:
Liquid – Anti-icing
Reverse – Same as the standard 550 Reverse function
GS12V – Enable a ground speed triggered digital output for custom use
Air Gate – Same as standard 550,, see 13.2 on page 17
Spn Rvs – Same as standard 550, see 13.5 on page 21
Only one of the above functions can be configured for the system.
.
14.1 Liquid – 1 Boom Anti-icing
This mode allows Conveyor, Spinner, Prewet and Anti-icing to run
simultaneously.

1. Select the Liquid mode under “Options” menu from USER screen.
2. Click on Valve icon and then click on NORM icon, and select “3 BOOM”.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 193 of 273


24/32

3. Press Up and Down buttons on operator screen to adjust Anti-icing rates

14.2 Liquid – Dedicated 3 Boom Anti-icing

Same as the standard 550, see 13.7 on previous page.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 194 of 273


25/32

14 Error Codes
The following error messages are user configurable, both timeouts and controller
actions.

Error Description # Suggested Solution


ERROR_BLAST_TOO_LONG 1 Turn off blast/time too short

ERROR_DEICE_BLST_TOO_LONG 2 Turn off blast/time too short

ERROR_OVERSPEED 3 Slow down or raise gate

ERROR_SPIN_PROP 4 Check cables, replace coil

ERROR_CONV_PROP 5 Check cables, replace coil

ERROR_CROSS1_PROP 6 Check cables, replace coil

ERROR_CROSS2_PROP 7 Check cables, replace coil

ERROR_NO_MATL_DETECT 8 Load material, check sensor

ERROR_NO_LIQ_DETECT 9 Load material, check sensor

ERROR_NO_GROUNDSPEED 10 Check cable/sensor

ERROR_NO_CONVEYOR 11 Check cable/sensor

ERROR_NO_LIQUID 12 Check cable/sensor

ERROR_NO_DEICE 13 Check cable/sensor

The following Errors are warning messages, and not user configurable.

Error 20 - Output Non-Zero. This is a safety function to prevent the controller from
accidentally sending an unexpected output when the controller is turned on, or
when the user leaves programming mode and enters normal operation mode. The
outputs will be kept at zero until the error condition is removed. To recover, set the
application rates to zero or exit Blast mode.

Error 21 - Unload Not Allowed. An attempt was made to enter Unload mode while
the truck was moving, which is not allowed. The Unload command will be ignored in
this case.

Error 22 - BB3 System Error. This is an unrecoverable error in the RC controller. Try
rebooting the controller to see if it goes away, otherwise report the failure to Bosch
Rexroth. This error can also occur if an attempt is made to run a joystick without
having an RCE controller present.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 195 of 273


26/32

Error 23 - This is a communication failure between the RC controller and the display.
It will show up in the logging history in the RC controller after the display is re-
connected.

Error 24 - RCE communication failure. This is a communication failure between the


RC controller and the RCE controller in a system with a joystick. It will automatically
shut down the joysticks. The status of this communication can also be monitored
using the display item called DIG which is available by double-tapping on the gear
icon while in normal operation mode. The item called DIG at the bottom right corner
of the display should normally be zero. It will be E0 if this error occurs.

Error 25 - Joystick 1 communication failure. This will shut down the joystick outputs,
and will show up as a 40 in the live DIG display item.

Error 26 - Joystick 2 communication failure. This will shut down the joystick outputs,
and will show up as a 80 in the live DIG display item.

Error 27 - No Gate Sensor. Gate sensor failure, most likely caused by cable break.
This will force the gate control into Manual.

Error 28 - Gate Position is Zero. This will occur only if the gate position is zero while
in gate read-back mode. The conveyor will not be allowed to move until this is fixed.

Error 29 - No Ground Speed Simulation. This is just an information message to


indicate that ground speed simulation mode has been stopped.

Error 30 - Under-Application: Spinner. The spinner cannot meet the desired RPM
setpoint. This should not happen in manual mode, but could happen if the spinner is
in PPS mode and the ground speed is high.

Error 31 - Under-Application: Conveyor. The conveyor cannot meet the desired RPM
setpoint. Caused by too high application rate or too high ground speed or incorrect
calibration..

Error 32 - Under-Application: Pre-Wet. The pre-wet pump cannot meet the desired
flow setpoint. Caused by too high application rate or too high ground speed or
incorrect calibration.

Error 33 - Under-Application: Anti-Ice. The anti-ice pump cannot meet the desired
flow setpoint. Caused by too high application rate or too high ground speed or
incorrect calibration.

Error 34 - Over-Application: Conveyor. The solid application rate is above setpoint.


Most likely caused by a minimum null value for conveyor output that is too high, so
the conveyor never stops.

Error 35 - Over-Application: Pre-Wet. The pre-wet application rate is above setpoint.


Most likely caused by a minimum null value for the pre-wet pump output that is too
high, so the pump never stops.

Error 36 - Over-Application: Anti-Ice. The anti-ice application rate is above setpoint.


Most likely caused by a minimum null value for the anti-ice pump output that is too
high, so the pump never stops.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 196 of 273


27/32

Error 37 - Calibration: Ground-Speed Pulses Too Low. Calculated pulses per km is


too low during calibration. Possibly caused by no sensor feedback, or try
recalibrating the ground speed sensor.

Error 38 - Spinner Maximum RPM Too Low. During auto nulling, the calculated
maximum RPM was too low, most likely caused by no sensor feedback.

Error 39 - Conveyor Maximum RPM Too Low. During auto nulling, the calculated
maximum RPM was too low, most likely caused by no sensor feedback.

Error 40 - Pre-Wet Maximum Hz Too Low. During auto nulling, the calculated
maximum Hz was too low, most likely caused by no sensor feedback.

Error 41 - Anti-Ice Maximum Hz Too Low. During auto nulling, the calculated
maximum Hz was too low, most likely caused by no sensor feedback.

Error 42 - Wrong Spinner Control Mode. An attempt was made to perform auto
nulling of a spinner while it was in manual.

Error 43 - Wrong Conveyor Control Mode. Not Used.

Error 44 - Wrong Pre-Wet Control Mode. An attempt was made to perform auto
nulling, or volume calibration, of a pre-wet pump while it was in manual.

Error 45 - Wrong Anti-Ice Control Mode. An attempt was made to perform auto
nulling, or volume calibration, of an anti-ice pump while it was in manual. This error
could also be caused by an I/O conflict between a cross conveyor mode and the
anti-ice pump output, in which case the anti-ice pump will be disabled.

Error 46 - Wrong Cross-Conveyor Mode. An attempt was made to go into Reverse


while this output was being used by a cross-conveyor mode. The Reverse command
will be ignored in this case. Could also be caused by attempting to use gm/sq.m.
mode while there was an I/O conflict with a Cross-Conveyor CA mode, in this case
gm/sq.m. mode will not be allowed. Could also be caused by attempting to use
closed-loop gate control while in Cross-Conveyor US mode or Liquid-Plus mode, in
which case the gate control will be forced into gate readback mode.

Error 47 - Wt. per Revolution Too Low. During conveyor weight calibration, the
calculated weight per revolution was too low, most likely caused by typing in zero
for the weight.

Error 48 - Wt. per Revolution Too High. During conveyor weight calibration, the
calculated weight per revolution was too high, most likely caused by no conveyor
sensor feedback.

Error 49 - Pre-Wet Pulses per Gallon Too Low. During calibration of pre-wet volume
output, the pulses/gal was too low, most likely caused by no flow sensor feedback.

Error 50 - Pre-Wet Pulses per Gallon Too Hi. During calibration of pre-wet volume
output, the pulses/gal was too high, most likely caused by typing in zero for the
volume.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 197 of 273


28/32

Error 51 - Anti-Ice Pulses per Gallon Too Low. During calibration of anti-ice volume
output, the pulses/gal was too low, most likely caused by no flow sensor feedback.

Error 52 - Anti-Ice Pulses per Gallon Too Hi. During calibration of anti-ice volume
output, the pulses/gal was too high, most likely caused by typing in zero for the
volume.

Error 53 - Spinner mm at zero RPM too Low. During calibration of the relationship
between spinner RPM and spinner spread width, a value of 0 mm at zero RPM was
used.

Error 54 - Spinner mm per RPM too Low. During calibration of the relationship
between spinner RPM and spinner spread width, a value of maximum spread width
was used that was less than the mm at zero RPM.

Error 55 - Gate Movement Too Low. During calibration of gate maximum and
minimum position, the difference between minimum and maximum height was less
than 1 inch.

Error 56 - Gate Zero in Manual. While in manual gate control mode, the operating
gate position was specified to be zero.

Error 57 - Gate at Calibration Too Low. While calibrating the weight per revolution
for a specific material, the gate position at calibration was specified to be zero.

Error 58 - Spinner PPR Too Low. A value of zero was used for spinner pulses per
revolution.

Error 59 - Conveyor PPR Too Low. A value of zero was used for conveyor pulses per
revolution.

Error 60 - Spinner Output Range Too Low. The difference between maximum and
minimum spinner nulling values was less than 5%.

Error 61 - Conveyor Output Range Too Low. The difference between maximum and
minimum conveyor nulling values was less than 5%.

Error 62 - Cross Conveyor 1 Output Range Too Low. The difference between
maximum and minimum cross conveyor nulling values was less than 5%.

Error 63 - Cross Conveyor 2 Output Range Too Low. The difference between
maximum and minimum cross conveyor nulling values was less than 5%.

Error 64 - Pre-Wet Output Range Too Low. The difference between maximum and
minimum pre-wet nulling values was less than 5%.

Error 65 - Anti-Ice Output Range Too Low. The difference between maximum and
minimum anti-ice nulling values was less than 5%.

Error 66 - Joystick 1 Output Range Too Low. The difference between maximum and
minimum joystick nulling values for one of the six outputs was less than 5%.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 198 of 273


29/32

Error 67 - Joystick 2 Output Range Too Low. The difference between maximum and
minimum joystick nulling values for one of the six outputs was less than 5%.

Error 68 - Theoretical Maximum Conveyor RPM Too High. Based on the specified
application rate setpoints, and the maximum ground speed, the maximum
theoretical conveyor RPM required has been calculated to be more than twice the
actual conveyor capacity, which will lead to serious under-application problems. The
actual controller RPM setpoint will be clamped at this value to prevent the
controller from becoming unstable, and the conveyor should be re-calibrated to
determine the source of the problem.

Error 69 - Theoretical Maximum Pre-Wet Hz Too High. Based on the specified


application rate setpoints, and the maximum ground speed, the maximum
theoretical pre-wet pump flow required has been calculated to be more than twice
the actual pump capacity, which will lead to serious under-application problems.
The actual pump flow setpoint will be clamped at this value to prevent the
controller from becoming unstable, and the pre-wet pump should be re-calibrated to
determine the source of the problem.

Error 70 - Theoretical Maximum Anti-Ice Hz Too High. Based on the specified


application rate setpoints, and the maximum ground speed, the maximum
theoretical anti-ice pump flow required has been calculated to be more than twice
the actual pump capacity, which will lead to serious under-application problems.
The actual pump flow setpoint will be clamped at this value to prevent the
controller from becoming unstable, and the anti-ice pump should be re-calibrated to
determine the source of the problem.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 199 of 273


30/32

15 Joystick Calibration
15.1 Solenoid Nulling
1. Start vehicle and achieve full pump flow.
2. Tap on Joystick symbol.

3. Press “CALIBRATION” button and press a mode button on the


joystick to select a desired mode to adjust.
4. Move the joystick slightly until the hydraulic actuator moves slowly – press
“Min” while the stick is deflected.
5. Move the joystick until the actuator moves at a safe maximum speed – press
“Max”.
6. Repeat this for all axis’, directions and modes.

Press “CALIBRATION” button again to save all changes.

15.2 Emergency (Panic Button) – If Equipped


1. Select the desired mode on the joystick and pull the joystick in the direction that
the emergency button should activate.
2. Press the round “EMG” button while the stick is deflected.

Any mode or direction can be assigned to Panic Button. In operation mode when the
Panic button is pushed in conjunction with the Deadman trigger, the selected
function(s) will activate simultaneously.

This joystick calibration is only required when a multifunction CANbus Joystick


Console is included with the system.

All the mode names and special functions will be configured by the factory. Only
solenoid nulling may be required.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 200 of 273


31/32

16 Advanced Joystick Set-up


16.1 Power Float
If equipped, the Power Float mode can also be edited.

Resetting
Re-engages float when the joystick is returned to neutral.

Non-
Non-resetting
The button must be pushed to re-enable the float after the stick is deflected.

16.2 Function Labels


All the joystick button names and function will be preset by the factory. The joystick
button names can be edited via the pull-down selection menus.

B1 is at the bottom left location and the buttons count up clockwise.

Note: Editing the names of the functions does not re-allocate the outputs on the
valve cable. They are fixed and defined in the valve layout for the specific system.

17 Warning
This glass LCD touch screen display has been extensively tested and validated
against its intended use. This glass could crack and break if the display is dropped
on to a hard surface or receives substantial impact. If the glass chips or cracks,
discontinue use and contact Bosch Rexroth Canada to have it replaced - do not

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 201 of 273


32/32

touch or attempt to remove the broken glass. Any misuse/abuse causing damage,
whether intended or not, will become the sole responsibility of the owner/buyer
which will render the warranty of this product, void.

Notes:

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 07.10.2013 ı Revision 3.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 202 of 273


CS 550/150RC
Desktop Software Manual

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 203 of 273


2/48

Table of Contents
1 Software Installation 5
2 Menu System 8
2.1 File Menu 8
2.1.1 Synchronize 8
2.1.2 Save Truck 8
2.1.3 Display Truck 8
2.1.4 Email Truck 9
2.1.5 Log Data 9
2.1.6 GPS Data 9
2.1.7 Exit 9
2.2 Options Menu 9
2.2.1 Choose Database 9
2.2.2 English/French 10
2.2.3 Import CS-550 Log 10
2.2.4 Import CS-440 Data 10
2.2.5 Sync at Start 10
2.3 Records Menu 10
2.3.1 Add Truck 10
2.3.2 Delete Truck 11
2.3.3 Reset Truck to Default 11
2.3.4 Reset Trip Summary 11
2.4 Select Truck Menu 11
2.5 Help Menu 11
2.5.1 CS-550 Help 12
2.5.2 About Truck 12
2.5.3 About Us 12
3 Truck Parameter Configuration 13
3.1 System Tab 13
3.1.1 System Units 13
3.1.2 Driver ID/Solid Name/Pre-wet Name/Anti-ice Name 13
3.1.3 Operator Access 13
3.1.4 Cross Conveyor Mode 14
3.1.5 Spinner Control Mode 15
3.1.6 Conveyor Control Mode 16
3.1.7 Pre-wet Control Mode 16
3.1.8 Anti-ice Control Mode 17
3.1.9 Gate Control Mode 18
3.1.10 Password Select 18

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 204 of 273


3/48

3.1.11 Spinner Stop Mode 18


3.1.12 Blast Solid Mode 19
3.1.13 Blast Pre-wet Mode 19
3.1.14 Blast Anti-ice Mode 19
3.1.15 Gate Setting 19
3.1.16 Blast Auto-off 20
3.1.17 Alarm Speed 20
3.1.18 Speed At Calibration 20
3.1.19 Speed Sensor Pulses 20
3.1.20 Temperature Sensor 20
3.1.21 Driver Names 20
3.2 Sensors & Valves Tab 20
3.2.1 Sensor Pulses per Revolution 21
3.2.2 Valve Nulling Parameters 21
3.2.3 Valve Output Forward Gain 21
3.2.4 Manual Application Rates 22
3.2.5 Manual Blast Rate 22
3.2.6 Spinner PPS Factor 22
3.2.7 Spinner Width Settings 22
3.2.8 Joystick Deadband 22
3.2.9 Cross Conveyor Nulling Values 22
3.2.10 Gate Min/Max 23
3.2.11 Gate Control % RPM Range 23
3.2.12 Gate Output Timer 23
3.2.13 Material Change/Liquid Detect Input Switch 23
3.2.14 Pre-wet/Anti-ice Interlock 23
3.2.15 Disable Remote Pause/Blast 23
3.2.16 Remember Knob Positions 24
3.3 Solid Material Tab 24
3.3.1 Solid Material Name 24
3.3.2 Solid Application Rate 24
3.3.3 Solid Blast Application Rate 24
3.3.4 Gate Position at Calibration 24
3.3.5 Weight per Revolution 25
3.3.6 Pre-wet Reduction 25
3.4 Pre-wet Liquid Tab 25
3.4.1 Pre-wet Material Name 25
3.4.2 Pre-wet Application Rate 25
3.4.3 Pre-wet Pulses per Litre 26
3.5 Anti-ice Liquid Tab 26
3.5.1 Anti-ice Material Name 26
3.5.2 Anti-ice Application Rate 26

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 205 of 273


4/48

3.5.3 Anti-ice Blast Application Rate 26


3.5.4 Anti-ice Pulses per Litre 27
3.6 Joystick Tab 27
3.6.1 Joystick Nulling Parameters (Output %) 27
3.6.2 Joystick Configuration Parameters 28
3.6.3 Joystick Type 29
3.6.4 Joystick Button Configuration Parameters 29
3.6.5 Joystick Toggle Mode Parameter 30
3.6.6 Power Float Configuration Parameters 30
3.6.7 Dump Limit/Auto-raise Configuration Parameters 31
3.6.8 Tow Plow Configuration 32
3.7 Error Configuration Tab 32
3.7.1 Error Configuration 33
3.7.2 Warning Messages 34
4 Logging Reports 39
5 GPS Data Reports 40
6 CS-550 WiFi Data Transfer 42
6.1 Initial WiFi Set-up 42
6.2 WiFi Data Transfer 44

Bosch Rexroth Canada Corp. reserves the right to revise this information at any time and for
any reason and reserves the right to make changes at any time, without notice or obligation,
to any of the information contained in this piece of literature.

Please check for updates at: www.boschrexroth.ca/compu-spread

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 206 of 273


5/48

1 Software Installation
On the CD, if the software installation does not start automatically, double-click on
the CS-550Desktop.msi file. If you cannot see what the file type is, allow the mouse
to hover over the filename, and you should see a tooltip message that says
“Windows Installer Package”.

On the screen that says “Welcome to the CS-550Desktop Set-up Wizard”, click
‘Next’.

On the screen that says “Select Installation Folder”, click ‘Next’. This should look as
shown below.

On the screen that says “Confirm Installation”, click ‘Next’.


If you are running Windows 7, there may be a delay here, and you will receive a
security warning message entitled “User Account Control”: ‘Do you want to allow
the following program from an unknown publisher to make changes to this
computer?’ Click ‘Yes’ to proceed.

On the screen that says “Installation Complete”, click ‘Close’.


If you accepted the default values above, then the program will be installed in the
directory C:\Program Files\CS-550Desktop\ and will be available for use by
everyone. The desktop should now contain a shortcut that looks like the icon to the
left.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 207 of 273


6/48

If you wish to view truck parameter reports in a printable form, or if you wish to
view logging reports, then you will need to install support for Crystal Reports. On
the CD, double-click on the file CRRedist2005_x86.msi and follow the on-screen
instructions to do this. If this installation is not performed, and if you try to access
truck parameters using the menu item ‘File->Display Truck’, then you may get the
warning message shown below.

If you are using the GPS/WiFi option, and if you want to view the GPS route, then
you will need to install Google Earth 5. On the CD, double-click on the file
GoogleEarthWin.exe and follow the on-screen instructions. On Windows 7, it is
recommended that you perform a right-mouse-button click on the file and select the
option ‘Run as Administrator’ if it is available. If this installation is not performed
and if you try to access GPS data using the menu item ‘File->GPS Data->Drive GPS
Route’ then you will receive the warning message shown below.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 208 of 273


7/48

Finally, the first time you run the CS-550 Desktop program, you will probably get the
warning shown below.

This is because the program automatically checks for the presence of a USB stick
every time it starts running. The USB stick is used to transfer data to and from the
CS-550 display. To avoid this message, you can insert a USB stick before starting
the program, or you can disable the automatic check. To disable the automatic
check, click on the menu item ‘Options->Sync at Start’. If you disable the automatic
check, you can manually check for a USB stick at any time by using the menu item
‘File->Synchronize’.

If you need to confirm the version number of the software, you can do so by clicking
on the menu item ‘Help->About Us’. This will produce a message in the format
shown below.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 209 of 273


8/48

2 Menu System
2.1 File Menu

2.1.1 Synchronize
This will check to see if a USB stick is present. If so, then truck parameter files will
be copied in both directions so that the computer’s hard disk and the USB drive are
exact duplicates of each other. No truck data files will ever be deleted by this
procedure. If two versions of the same truck are found, then the newest one will be
kept. Log data files will be moved from the USB stick to the computer and will be
read into a Microsoft Access database. The original log file will be deleted on the
USB stick, but kept on the computer.

The ‘Synchronize’ item is also accessible using the icon shortcut (shown to the left)
at the top middle of the menu bar.

2.1.2 Save Truck


The truck parameters for the current truck will be saved to a .bin file in a sub-
directory called 550Data. The file name will have the format ’region_truck_Parm.bin’.

2.1.3 Display Truck


The truck parameters for the current truck will be saved to a .bin file in a sub-
directory called 550Data. The file name will have the format ’region_truck_Parm.bin’.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 210 of 273


9/48

2.1.4 Email Truck


Similar to ‘Display Truck’, except that the Crystal Report will be emailed as an
attachment. The format of the attachment is ‘Rich Text Format’. However, for
security reasons, the file will be automatically renamed to be ‘untitled.txt’. The
person that receives it will need to rename it to be *.rtf before attempting to view it.

2.1.5 Log Data


This will bring up a new dialog window to allow for selection of logging data. For
more detail, see Section 4, ‘Logging Reports’. The ‘Log Data’ item is also accessible
using an icon shortcut (shown to the left) at the top middle of the menu bar.

2.1.6 GPS Data


This will bring up a new dialog window to allow for selection of GPS trip data. For
more detail, see Section 5, ‘GPS Data Reports’. The ‘GPS Data’ item is also
accessible using an icon shortcut (shown to the left) at the top middle of the menu
bar.

2.1.7 Exit
This will stop the program. If you have edited the truck data, you will be prompted
to save the data.

2.2 Options Menu

2.2.1 Choose Database


The logging data is stored in a Microsoft Access database called compu550.mdb.
The location of this database can be found using the menu item Help->About Us. If
there are multiple available logging databases, and if you do not wish to merge
these databases, then they need to be stored in separate directories. This menu
item allows you to switch from one logging database to another by browsing to a
new location. This new location will be remembered for future use.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 211 of 273


10/48

Please note that all future Synchronizations of data will be performed at the new
location, so the old parameter database at the old location will be abandoned and a
new parameter database will be started at the new location. The parameter data is
stored separately from the logging data, in a subdirectory called 550Data.

2.2.2 English/French
This allows you to switch to a new language. The switch will take place only after
you close and restart the program.

2.2.3 Import CS-550 Log


This allows you to browse to a new location and select a CS-550 database
(compu550.mdb) to merge with the current database. Only the logging data will be
imported. If you wish to import CS-550 parameter data, and if they are not available
on a USB stick, the individual parameter files can be manually copied from the
directory 550Data. The parameter files will always have file names in the format
region_truck_Parm.bin.

2.2.4 Import CS-440 Data


This allows you to browse to a new location and select a CS-440 database
(compu.mdb) to merge with the current database. Both logging data and parameter
data will be imported. The parameter data will be converted into individual files
with names of the type region_truck_Parm.bin in the directory 550Data.

2.2.5 Sync at Start


This is a toggle switch to enable or disable automatic synchronization when the
program is started.

2.3 Records Menu

2.3.1 Add Truck


This will bring up a dialog box to allow you to create a new truck by choosing a new
region name and truck name. The region name/truck name pair must be unique, not
previously used. The names can be 9 characters long, and will be capitalized.
Punctuation characters like ?, >, <, : should not be used. The new truck will be a
copy of the most recent data for the current truck.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 212 of 273


11/48

2.3.2 Delete Truck


This will delete the current truck. If a USB stick is present then it will also be
searched to see if this truck exists on the USB stick. A request for confirmation will
be issued, indicating which files will be deleted. In order to delete a truck
permanently, it is necessary to delete it both on the hard disk and on the USB stick.

2.3.3 Reset Truck to Default


This will set all the truck operating parameters back to factory default. It will also
reset the joystick nulling values for joystick outputs back to default, but will not
otherwise modify the joystick configuration. The region name, truck name, and
system units are unaffected by this reset. A request for confirmation will be issued,
before performing the reset.

2.3.4 Reset Trip Summary


This will clear the trip summary, which is the accumulated spreading data which is
shown live on the display. A request for confirmation will be issued, before
performing the reset.

2.4 Select Truck Menu

When selecting a truck you will first specify the region and then select a truck from
within that region. The main menu shows a list of available regions for which truck
parameter data is available. When you hover over a region, then the sub-menu
shows a list of available trucks in that region. Clicking on this truck name will load a
new set of truck data and you will be prompted to save the previous truck, if any
changes were made.

2.5 Help Menu

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 213 of 273


12/48

2.5.1 CS-550 Help


This will load the help file CS-550Desktop.chm, which contains the same text as the
current file. The help file is also available by pressing the function key F1.

2.5.2 About Truck


This shows the current region name, truck name, and the date of the most recent
upload of parameter data. The following information is also shown:

Firmware Version
This can be 400 for an RC4-4 platform, or 200 for an RC2-2 platform, with an
optional (tow) in either case, if the device is a tow plow. The firmware version could
also be in the series 1xx for an imported CS-440 MC-08 or 2xx for an imported CS-
440 RC6-9. In this case, both the RC build No. and the Display build No. would be
zero.

RC Build No.
This is the version number of the firmware in the RC controller. This will be zero if
the truck configuration data has never been downloaded into the RC controller.

Display Build No.


This is the version number of the firmware in the display. This will be zero if the
truck configuration data has never been downloaded into the display.

File
This is the file name of the truck parameter data. It can be found in the subdirectory
550Data and it should follow the format regionname_truckname_Parm.bin.

2.5.3 About Us
This shows the current desktop software version number, and the location of the
logging database, which is also the location of the 550Data directory that contains
the truck parameter data.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 214 of 273


13/48

3 Truck Parameter Configuration


3.1 System Tab

3.1.1 System Units


The units of measure, Metric or Imperial, can be selected here. After changing the
units, it is recommended that you perform a software reset.

3.1.2 Driver ID/Solid Name/Pre-wet Name/Anti-ice Name


Select one of four values for Driver ID, Solid Material, Pre-wet Material, Anti-ice
Material.

3.1.3 Operator Access


This option allows management to limit the operator control over the gate and
material selection.

None
This option will prevent the operator from making any changes to the gate setting
or the material selected.

Material
This option will allow the operator to make changes to the material selection.

Gate
This option will allow the operator to make changes to the manual gate setting.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 215 of 273


14/48

Material and Gate


This option will allow the operator to make changes to the manual gate setting as
well as the material selection.

3.1.4 Cross Conveyor Mode


This is a generic term to cover a variety of hardware configurations. For the RC4-4
platform the modes are defined as follows:

Normal
This will be the most typical configuration, which supports spinner/conveyor/pre-
wet/anti-ice and closed loop gate control. It also supports two additional outputs:
reverse, and a GS12V digital output signal which is turned on by a ground-speed
input. The four outputs: Pre-wet, Anti-ice, GS12V and Reverse can be redefined to
be used for 3 boom anti-icing, in which case they become: Boom left, Anti-ice
output, Boom centre, and Boom right.

Pattern
This supports closed loop gate control, pre-wet, and two momentary-contact digital
outputs to adjust the position of a chute for pattern spreading. It also supports the
option of simulated anti-ice output on the pre-wet channel.

Air Gate
This supports pre-wet output, reverse output, and a special digital output to move
the gate to a fixed location.

Liquid Plus
This supports pre-wet, plus 3 boom anti-icing, and reverse.

Cross Conveyor CA
This supports closed loop gate control, Pre-wet, and an analog output and two
digital outputs for controlling a cross conveyor.

Cross Conveyor US
This supports pre-wet, GS12V output, reverse, and two analog signals for controlling
cross conveyors.

Spinner Reverse
This supports re-direction of the spinner output to either a forward or reverse motor
using a live switch. In this mode anti-icing is disabled, and the normal pre-wet
output signal will be sent to the spinner connector on the cable. The spinner
forward signal is sent to the pre-wet connection and the spinner reverse signal is
sent to the anti-ice connection.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 216 of 273


15/48

For the RC2-2 platform the modes are defined differently. In this case the modes
refer to the use that is made of the digital output labeled ‘S7 Reverse’:

2-2 Anti-ice
Supports anti-icing output, in addition to the normal pre-wet.

2-2 Reverse
Supports conveyor reverse signal.

2-2 GS12V
Supports GS12V digital output signal, which is turned on by ground-speed input.

2-2 Air Gate


Support a special digital output to move the gate to a fixed location.

2-2 Spinner Reverse


Supports spinner reverse, with the same output re-direction as for the 4-4 platform.

3.1.5 Spinner Control Mode


This specifies the mode in which the spinner operates.

Closed Loop
The controller receives a signal from a feedback sensor that measures the spinner
RPM. Spinner speed can be controlled to give a previously calibrated spread width.

PPS Mode
"Precision Placement System". In this mode the spinner speed is proportional to
ground speed, using a previously calibrated relationship.

Manual
The spinner does not have any feedback from either the ground speed sensor or the
spinner speed sensor, instead the speed is specified by means of a preset
percentage of output.

Half Lane
The spinner speed and spread width will increment in units of half a lane as the
spinner knob position is increased. The conveyor output will be proportional to the
spinner output, so that the amount spread per lane remains constant. The pre-wet
output will also be proportional to the spinner output, so that the pre-wet
application rate in liter/tonne remains constant. The spinner control mode will be
manual, and the conveyor and pre-wet control modes should be either open loop or
closed loop.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 217 of 273


16/48

Full Lane
Same as ‘Half Lane’ mode, except that the spinner speed and spread width will
increment in units of a full lane as the spinner knob position is increased, and the
conveyor and pre-wet will increase proportionately.

3.1.6 Conveyor Control Mode


This specifies the mode in which the conveyor operates.

Closed Loop
This is a closed loop controller which uses a feedback signal from both the ground
speed sensor and the conveyor speed sensor to apply the desired application rate in
units of weight per distance travelled.

Open Loop
This uses feedback from the ground speed sensor to apply the desired application
rate as above. The conveyor speed sensor is not used, but the conveyor speed is
calculated based on valve position.

On/Off
This is a manual mode of operation in which the conveyor is interlocked with a
ground speed sensor, so the conveyor shuts down if the ground speed is zero.

Manual
In this mode, the controller does not have any feedback from either the ground
speed sensor or the conveyor speed sensor, the application rate is determined by
means of a preset percentage of conveyor output.

gm/sq.m.
This is a closed loop control mode in which both solid and liquid application rates
are specified in terms of weight per area (square meters) rather than weight per
distance. The width of the spread area is calculated based on the spinner RPM.

KOMBI
This is a closed loop control mode similar to gm/sq.m. in which the total application
rate is specified in terms of weight per area. The liquid application rate is specified
as a percent of the total, rather than as weight per area.

3.1.7 Pre-wet Control Mode


This specifies the mode in which the pre-wet controller operates.

Off
This deactives the pre-wet controller.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 218 of 273


17/48

Fixed Pre-wet
Select the fixed pre-wet mode if the pre-wet system consists of a limited flow pump
driven by the conveyor motor exhaust oil.

Closed Loop
In this mode the liquid system has an inline flow meter which measures flow rate
using a pulse rate. The controller will control the liquid flow to be a constant
fraction of the conveyor solid flow. The fraction is specified as liters/tonne or
gallon/ton.

Manual
The application rate is determined by means of a preset percentage of liquid output.

On/Off
This is a manual mode of operation in which the pre-wet is interlocked with a
ground speed sensor, so the pre-wet shuts down if the ground speed is zero.

Return Oil to Pre-wet


Similar to fixed pre-wet, but with an additional on-off control signal which is needed
to enable the flow.

3.1.8 Anti-ice Control Mode


This specifies the mode in which the anti-ice controller operates.

Off
This deactives the anti-ice controller.

1 Boom
This is a closed loop controller which uses a feedback signal from both the ground
speed sensor and the anti-ice flow meter to apply the desired application rate in
units of volume per distance travelled.

3 Boom
This is a closed loop controller which uses a feedback signal from both the ground
speed sensor and the anti-ice flow meter to apply the desired application rate in
units of volume per distance travelled per boom activated. The volume of output is
proportional to the number of booms that are on, and there are digital outputs to
activate each boom.

Manual
The application rate is determined by means of a preset percentage of anti-ice
output.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 219 of 273


18/48

3.1.9 Gate Control Mode


This specifies the mode in which the gate is connected to the system.

Manual
Gate position is fixed, and the value of the gate height must be specified by the
operator at startup, or during calibration.

Read Back
A read-back device is attached to the gate. The controller will read and use the
actual gate position. Gate height must be manually adjusted.

Closed Loop
A read-back device is used and the gate is under hydraulic control as well. The gate
will be controlled to close at zero ground speed, and to minimize variations in
conveyor RPM when running. The gate operating position can be manipulated
directly from the controller for calibration purposes.

3.1.10 Password Select


A USB key protects the system programming mode. If further security is desired, the
password function can be enabled.

Disabled
No password is used, and only the USB key is needed to enter programming mode.

Enabled
A password will be generated and will be needed each time the programming mode
is entered.

If the password is enabled, a text box will allow you to enter a password. This
should be 3 characters long, and consist only of numbers, in the range 0 - 999.

3.1.11 Spinner Stop Mode


For safety reasons it is preferred that the spinner be stopped whenever there are
operating conditions which do not require the spinner. There are four possible
situations that can occur:

Always On
If this is selected the spinner will always be turning whenever a spinner rate is
selected by the operator.

Zero Speed Only


The spinner will stop whenever the vehicle stops.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 220 of 273


19/48

Pause Only
The spinner will stop whenever the system is in the Pause mode.

Zero Speed and Pause


The spinner will stop whenever the vehicle is stopped or the system is in the Pause
mode.

3.1.12 Blast Solid Mode


This specifies the control mode for the conveyor when blasting.

Max Output
This is a manual control mode in which the conveyor runs at maximum output when
Blast is activated. The conveyor will stop if the ground speed is zero. The maximum
output value can be adjusted during calibration.

Stationary Max
This is a manual control mode in which the conveyor runs at maximum output when
Blast is activated. The conveyor will continue to run even if the ground speed is
zero.

Closed Loop
This is a closed loop blast control mode in which the conveyor will deliver a fixed
amount of weight per distance. The blast rate can be adjusted during calibration.

Off
This deactivates the Blast function.

3.1.13 Blast Pre-wet Mode


This enables or disables pre-wetting the material while in Blast mode. If pre-wetting
in the Blast mode is turned on, the "Pre-wet Rate" and "Solid Reduction" settings
will still apply, the same as in normal operation.

3.1.14 Blast Anti-ice Mode


This enables or disables anti-icing while in Blast mode. If anti-icing in the Blast
mode is turned on, the anti-ice rate can be adjusted during calibration, both for
manual-mode anti-icing and for closed loop anti-icing.

3.1.15 Gate Setting


This allows the setting of the gate opening for normal spreading operation. It is
used only when the gate control is manual. The gate setting can be set during
calibration, or in the operator’s screen, if the Operator Options permits access.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 221 of 273


20/48

3.1.16 Blast Auto-off


Auto-off Mode
Specify a time in seconds. Use 0 to disable this feature. If time is non-zero then the
blast function will automatically be deactivated once the time has expired.

3.1.17 Alarm Speed


This is the ground speed at which an alarm will sound and will be displayed on the
console. The "Alarm Speed" is not activated when the spread rate is zero or the
controller is in the Pause mode.

3.1.18 Speed at Calibration


This is the ground speed at which the speed sensor calibration will be performed.

3.1.19 Speed Sensor Pulses


This is the number of pulses per km (mi) for the speed sensor. If this value has been
provided by the manufacturer of the transmission, then enter it here. Otherwise, a
sensor calibration should be performed by driving at the desired Speed at
Calibration.

3.1.20 Temperature Sensor


There are currently two types of preconfigured temperature sensors that are
selectable. Select either "Not Installed", "Sprague", or "Controls". The text box
beside the sensor contains the % correction of the application rate per degree of
temperature change.

3.1.21 Driver Names


There are 4 text boxes to specify driver names. The names can be 8 characters long,
and will be capitalized.

3.2 Sensors & Valves Tab

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 222 of 273


21/48

3.2.1 Sensor Pulses per Revolution


The process of sensor calibration tells the controller the quantity of material that
discharges from the main conveyor per revolution of the shaft. In order to relate the
shaft revolutions to the quantity actually measured by the controller, which is
tachometer pulses per second, the controller needs to know how many pulses per
revolution the sensor produces.

The number of pulses per revolution will vary depending on the make of the sensor,
and should be obtained from the manufacturer.

In the case of a liquid flowmeter, there is no physical shaft whose RPM can be
measured, therefore, the ‘pulses per rev.’ is not used. Instead a direct relationship
is measured between accumulated tachometer pulses and accumulated liquid
volume of output.

3.2.2 Valve Nulling Parameters


The process of "Nulling" sets the minimum and maximum outputs to the
conveyor/spinner/liquid valve. This process can only be completed in the vehicle.
See the Valve Nulling section of the CS-550/150 Calibration Manual.

Minimum Valve Output


This value reflects the % output required to start the conveyor (or liquid pump) and
is an indication of the amount of friction present in the delivery system.

Maximum Valve Output


This value reflects the % output required to attain maximum conveyor (or liquid
pump) speed, this is the point at which further opening of the valve does not
increase the conveyor (or liquid pump) speed.

Maximum RPM
This is the RPM at the maximum valve output. For a closed loop controller, it will be
calculated automatically during the auto-nulling event. For an open loop controller,
it could be obtained from a manufacturer’s spec sheet or by comparison with
similar closed loop results. For a liquid pump, the measured value will be a pulse
rate in Hz (pulses/sec) instead of RPM.

3.2.3 Valve Output Forward Gain


This is the percentage of valve output increase, introduced on conveyor start up,
when the vehicle starts to move, to overcome hydraulic motor pulsing and provide
for instant, continuous movement of the conveyor.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 223 of 273


22/48

3.2.4 Manual Application Rates


Manual operation output settings (% of max. pump speed): These settings set the
conveyor output for each of the 9 settings of the application rate dial, while in
manual mode. Each setting is a percentage of the maximum pump speed.

3.2.5 Manual Blast Rate


This is the percent output to the conveyor/spinner/anti-ice valve while in the manual
blast mode. The pre-wet valve does not have a special blast rate if it is in manual
mode. The spinner blast function can be disabled by setting this rate to zero. This is
the default.

3.2.6 Spinner PPS Factor


This is the factor that controls the speed of the spinner while in PPS mode (Positive
Placement System). It is in units of RPM per mph, so the spinner speed is
proportional to the vehicle speed.

3.2.7 Spinner Width Settings


Spinner spread-width parameters - The spread width of the spinner, in mm, is
calculated using the formula:

width = ‘width minimum’ + spinner RPM * ‘width (mm/rpm)’

This spread width is used only if the conveyor is in “gm/sq.m.” or “KOMBI” mode.

3.2.8 Joystick Deadband


The deadband specifies the width of the joystick neutral zone in units of % of total
range. The default is 10%.

3.2.9 Cross Conveyor Nulling Values


These are minimum and maximum output values for the cross conveyors, similar to
the nulling values for the spinner/conveyor outputs. They will apply to either the
dual conveyors of the ‘Cross Conveyor US’ configuration or the single conveyor
output of the ‘Cross Conveyor CA’ configuration. If no cross conveyors are used,
then these maximum output values will be used to determine the strength of the
closed loop gate control outputs.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 224 of 273


23/48

3.2.10 Gate Min/Max


These are the actual gate positions when calibrating the gate feedback sensor.

In Imperial units, normally 0 - 10 inches.


In metric units, normally 0 - 25 cm.

These gate settings are used only if you are in ‘Gate Read-Back’ mode or ‘Closed
Loop Gate’ mode.

3.2.11 Gate Control % RPM Range


For the closed loop gate controller, this is the range of variation allowed in the
conveyor RPM setpoint before the gate will be opened or closed to stabilize the
RPM. The default value is +/- 10%. A smaller value will give more precise control of
RPM, but at the risk of having the gate controller oscillate, or hunt, indefinitely for a
solution. The optimum value will depend on the speed of response of the gate to
any signal to move.

3.2.12 Gate Output Timer


This is the number of computer cycles that a digital output will be sent to the gate
when adjusting it manually using the operator display. If the gate is overshooting the
desired position, reduce this number. If the gate movement is too slow, increase
this value.

3.2.13 Material Change/Liquid Detect Input Switch


On the AUX connector, on the main RC4-4 harness, pin 1 can be allocated to be
used either as a digital input to switch between different materials (1->3, 2->4), or it
can be used to detect low pressure in the liquid pump, which will trigger a liquid
shutdown. The radio button will specify which function is being used: the default is
‘material change’.

3.2.14 Pre-wet/Anti-ice Interlock


Normally, the pre-wet and anti-ice controllers will be run as independent outputs.
However, in some case it may be necessary to interlock them so that only one
output can be active at one time. This will need to be done if you are driving both
liquid outputs using a single valve with an asymmetrical spool. This checkbox will
enable the interlock: the default behavior is ‘no interlock’.

3.2.15 Disable Remote Pause/Blast


On the AUX connector, on the main RC4-4 harness, pin 6 is Remote Blast and pin 8
is Remote Pause. The Remote Pause/Blast feature can be disabled by selecting this
checkbox, in which case these two digital inputs can be used for other purposes,
such as inputs to the GPS tracking system.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 225 of 273


24/48

3.2.16 Remember Knob Positions


This option will allow the controller to remember the previous knob positions on the
next reboot. If the ground speed is not zero on startup, then the knob positions will
be set to zero.

3.3 Solid Material Tab

3.3.1 Solid Material Name


There are 4 text boxes to specify solid material names. The names can be 6
characters long, and will be capitalized.

3.3.2 Solid Application Rate


An application rate can be entered here in units of kg per km, or lbs per mile. These
rates are used when the controller is either in open loop or closed loop mode. Each
box corresponds to a position of the application rate dial.

3.3.3 Solid Blast Application Rate


The blast application rate can be entered here in units of kg per km, or lbs per mile.
This rate will be used when the Blast button is pushed and the controller is either in
open loop or closed loop mode.

3.3.4 Gate Position at Calibration


This is the gate setting used during the calibration of the weight per revolution. It is
recommended that this gate setting be similar to the gate setting normally used for
this material during spreading operations.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 226 of 273


25/48

3.3.5 Weight per Revolution


This setting refers to the weight of material discharging from the main conveyor for
every revolution of the conveyor.

Note: This number will automatically be generated as a result of the weight


calibration process. (See the Material Calibration section of the CS-550/150
Calibration Manual.) When in closed loop mode, the controller will calculate weight
per revolution during the calibration. When in open loop mode, the controller will
calculate weight per minute, which is the weight delivered while running at
maximum output for one minute.

If the calibration is checked using a timed catch test, and if it is found that the
calibration is off, then this number can be manually adjusted to bring the calibration
into line with the catch test.

3.3.6 Pre-wet Reduction


The percentage reduction of solid material whenever the pre-wet is activated can be
set with this option. The figure entered is a percent reduction of the solid spread
rate setpoint while spreading.

3.4 Pre-wet Liquid Tab

3.4.1 Pre-wet Material Name


There are 4 text boxes to specify pre-wet material names. The names can be 6
characters long, and will be capitalized.

3.4.2 Pre-wet Application Rate


An application rate can be entered here in units of liters per tonne, or gals per ton.
These rates are used when the controller is in closed loop control mode. Each box
corresponds to a position of the pre-wet application rate dial.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 227 of 273


26/48

3.4.3 Pre-wet Pulses per Litre


This setting refers to the number of feedback sensor pulses per volume of liquid
delivered by the pump.

Note: This number will automatically be generated as a result of the pre-wet


calibration process. (See the Material Calibration section of the CS-550/150
Calibration Manual.)

If the calibration is checked using a timed catch test, and if it is found that the
calibration is off, then this number can be manually adjusted to bring the calibration
into line with the catch test.

3.5 Anti-ice Liquid Tab

3.5.1 Anti-ice Material Name


There are 4 text boxes to specify anti-ice material names. The names can be 6
characters long, and will be capitalized.

3.5.2 Anti-ice Application Rate


An application rate can be entered here in units of liters per km, or gals per mile.
These rates are used when the controller is in closed loop control mode. Each box
corresponds to a position of the anti-ice application rate dial.

3.5.3 Anti-ice Blast Application Rate


The blast application rate can be entered here in units of liters per km, or gals per
mile. This rate will be used when the Blast button is pushed and the controller is in
closed loop control mode.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 228 of 273


27/48

3.5.4 Anti-ice Pulses per Litre


This setting refers to the number of feedback sensor pulses per volume of liquid
delivered by the pump.

Note: This number will automatically be generated as a result of the anti-ice


calibration process. (See the Material Calibration section of the CS-550/150
Calibration Manual.)

If the calibration is checked using a timed catch test, and if it is found that the
calibration is off, then this number can be manually adjusted to bring the calibration
into line with the catch test.

3.6 Joystick Tab

3.6.1 Joystick Nulling Parameters (Output %)


The process of "Nulling" sets the minimum and maximum outputs to the joystick.

Minimum Joystick Output


This value reflects the output required to start movement of the output device.

Maximum Joystick Output


This value reflects the maximum output you wish to send to the device.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 229 of 273


28/48

Emg. Joystick Output


This is the output you wish to send to the device when you push the emergency
button.

There are a total of 16 possible outputs. These are arranged in groups of two. In
each group, ‘A’ is normally the ‘down’ direction and ‘B’ is normally ‘up’. Twelve of
these outputs are analog signals, so the range of output is from 0 to 100%. The
remaining four are digital outputs which are either on or off. The Emg. setting for
these four outputs is either 1 or 0, to enable or disable the emergency output.

3.6.2 Joystick Configuration Parameters


Output PWM #
The joystick inputs are organized first by joystick number, where the first joystick in
the system would always be called Joystick 1, and the second joystick, which is
optional, would be Joystick 2. Then the input signals are organized into four modes,
where the mode switching is done with a joystick button. The four modes operate
exclusively of each other, so only one mode is active at any time. However, it is
possible to have the same input or output present in more than one mode, since
they do not interfere with each other. Finally the input signals are organized by axis,
X or Y or Z. For each axis, it is necessary to allocate one output, either A or B, from
the 8 pairs of outputs that are available. The other member of the pair will be
allocated automatically to the other direction of movement of the axis. The normal
allocation would be that X axis left movement, and Y axis forward push, and Z axis
counter-clockwise twist would be called ‘down’ and would be allocated to an ‘A’
output. Therefore the default allocation is always ‘A’ for all axes. If this output
direction is not suitable, then use the corresponding ‘B’ output from the same pair.

Function Type
Each joystick axis can operate in four possible modes. These modes are: disabled,
proportional output, on/off at 5%, on/off at 10%. The on/off modes are modes in
which the normal proportional output of the joystick has been converted in the
software to an on/off signal with a different threshold of movement to trigger the
switch, either 5% or 10% of the full stroke.

Float Enable
The power float output can be disabled by moving a specific joystick axis in the ‘B’
direction. This checkbox indicates which axis will be used. Only one axis, and only
one mode, can be chosen for this task. If two Power Floats are configured then two
joystick axes need to be chosen.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 230 of 273


29/48

Dump Limit Enable


The dump limit enable function can disable the joystick output to a specific ‘B’
output if a digital input is received. This checkbox specifies which joystick axes will
be affected. Multiple axes and multiple modes can be simultaneously selected for
this function, but in each case only the ‘B’ output will be affected. Alternatively, if
either the ‘Auto-raise’ feature or the ‘Tow Plow Deploy’ feature is enabled, then this
checkbox will specify which joystick axis is to be used. In the case of ‘Auto-raise’
and ‘Tow Plow Deploy’, only a single axis should be chosen. Note that the ‘Dump
Limit’ and ‘Auto-raise’ and ‘Tow Plow Deploy’ features are mutually exclusive, only
one feature can be enabled.

3.6.3 Joystick Type


If no joysticks are present, then both ‘Joy 1 Type’ and ‘Joy 2 Type’ should be ‘None’.
If one joystick is present then choose ‘Joy 1 Type’ as ‘CH_11’. If two joysticks are
present then set ‘Joy 2 Type’ as ‘CH_21’.

3.6.4 Joystick Button Configuration Parameters


The joystick buttons are organized by joystick number, where ‘Stick 1’ corresponds
to the first joystick in the system and ‘Stick 2’ is the second, optional, joystick. Each
button can be assigned to one of the following functions:

None
Disabled

Mode 1 - Mode 4
One of four modes which are mutually exclusive; defined in the ‘Joystick
Configuration’ section. These mode switching buttons are interlocked so that only
one mode can be active. All double-pushes of more than one button will be ignored.
Latched output.

Emergency
Activates the emergency outputs configured in the ‘Output (%)’ section. Momentary
contact.

Pause
Puts the controller into ‘Pause’ mode. Latched output.

Blast
Puts the controller into ‘Blast’ mode. Latched output.

Power Float
One of the input signals required to activate power float output. Latched output.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 231 of 273


30/48

Low Oil Override


This specifies that this joystick button will be used as a ‘Low Oil Override’.
Momentary contact.

Spin Reverse
Activates a spinner reverse digital output signal. Latched output.

Aux A
Activates a digital output signal. Momentary contact.

Aux B
Activates a digital output signal. If both ‘Aux A’ and ‘Aux B’ are used, then the
outputs will be interlocked so that only one output is active. All double-pushes of
both buttons will be ignored. Momentary contact.

Dump Limit
One of the input signals required to activate dump limit. Momentary contact.

Power Float 2
One of the input signals required to activate the second power float. Latched
output.

PTO
One of the input signals that can be used to re-activate the PTO output. Momentary
contact.

3.6.5 Joystick Toggle Mode Parameter


The normal behavior of the joystick mode-switching buttons is that pushing a button
will cause that mode to be activated, and then the system will stay in that mode
until some other mode button is pushed. This is the default behavior, which is
obtained by setting the joystick toggle mode parameter to zero. An alternative
behavior is to specify one mode as being a toggle mode using this parameter. Only
one toggle mode can be chosen and it must be a mode that has previously been
defined by allocating a button to it. For the toggle mode, pushing the mode button
will temporarily activate the mode, and then releasing the button will cause the
mode to revert back to the previous mode. All the other mode buttons will behave
as normal, unaffected by this.

3.6.6 Power Float Configuration Parameters


The right-hand-side text box specifies the Power Float functionality:

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 232 of 273


31/48

0
Disabled.

1
Reset option. This is the same as the Non-Reset option except that, when the Power
Float output has been interrupted by sending a joystick output, then it is necessary
to put the joystick into neutral and also release the joystick button before the Power
Float can be reactivated.

2
Non-Reset option. This is the default. When both the joystick button and the
proximity switch are active, then the Power Float output will be activated. Activating
the appropriate joystick output will shut off the Power Float. It can be reactivated
by moving the joystick to neutral.

The left-hand-side text box specifies some additional Power Float options:

0
Proximity switch required, one Power Float.

2
Proximity switch required, two Power Floats.

3.6.7 Dump Limit/Auto-raise Configuration Parameters


The right-hand-side text box specifies the dump limit functionality:

0
Disabled.

1
Dump limit enabled. This will disable a specific joystick ‘B’ output if a limit switch is
encountered. The output disable can be overridden with a joystick button.

2
Tow plow deploy enabled. This will disable a specific joystick ‘B’ output unless the
joystick mode button is pushed. The mode button serves two purposes here: It acts
as a latched output to switch into tow plow deploy mode, and it also acts as a
momentary contact to momentarily enable output to this axis.

The left-hand-side text box specifies the Auto-raise functionality:

0
Disabled.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 233 of 273


32/48

X
Time in seconds for the Auto-raise feature. This will activate a specific joystick axis
‘B’ output for X seconds if a digital input signal is received, typically from a ground-
speed sensor. This axis will be activated regardless of what mode the joystick is in.
The Auto-raise will be activated only once, when the digital input signal is initially
turned on. It will turn off after X seconds regardless of the status of the digital
signal. The Auto-raise can be restarted by turning off the digital signal and then
turning it back on.

The three options: ‘Dump Limit’, ‘Tow Plow Deploy’, and ‘Auto-raise’ are mutually
exclusive, meaning that either the left text box or the right text box should be zero.

Independently of the above three options, there is a fourth option called


‘Emergency/Pause Interlock’. This will force the controller into a ‘Pause’ state if the
joystick emergency button is pushed. This is a momentary contact. This option can
be enabled by adding 4 to the right-hand-side textbox regardless of what the
original values of either textbox were.

3.6.8 Tow Plow Configuration


This checkbox will indicate that the controller is a tow plow. The main truck
controller in a tow plow set-up will not receive any special designation, but the tow
plow controller will be indicated with this checkbox. The tow plow controller is not
allowed to have a joystick and it uses different CAN ID’s than the main truck
controller.

3.7 Error Configuration Tab

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 234 of 273


33/48

3.7.1 Error Configuration


Error messages are divided into two categories: ‘Errors’ which are configurable, and
‘Warnings’ which are not configurable. Configuring an error message consists of
choosing a severity level for the error, which will determine what is done when it
occurs, and choosing a timeout value, which is the number of seconds the controller
will allow the error condition to exist before reporting it.

The following severity levels can be used:


• Disabled – Error is disabled, not reported.
• Take no Action – Issue a warning and continue normal operation. Intended for
non-critical errors, such as over-speed error.
• Go to Open loop – The conveyor goes to open loop operation. Typically reserved
for conveyor feed-back sensor failure.
• Go to Manual – Force a controller into manual operation. Typically reserved for
ground-speed sensor failure. This severity code is context-sensitive: if triggered
by a liquid sensor then only that liquid controller will be affected; otherwise all
the controllers will be affected.
• Output to Zero – Force a controller output to be zero. The operator will need to
restart the controller by shutting the main power source OFF and ON again. This
severity code is context-sensitive: if triggered by a liquid sensor then only that
liquid controller will be affected; otherwise all the controllers will be affected.

The following configurable errors can occur:

Error Description Explanation


Number
Error 1 Blast Too Long The time limit for the Blast function has been exceeded.

Error 2 De-ice Blast Too Long The time limit for the Anti-ice Blast function has been
exceeded.

Error 3 Over-Speed The vehicle has exceeded the maximum allowable speed.

Error 4 Spinner Valve Output An open circuit has been detected in the conveyor output.
Failure This could also be caused by setting a maximum nulling
output value too large.

Error 5 Conveyor Valve An open circuit has been detected in the conveyor output.
Output Failure This could also be caused by setting a maximum nulling
output value too large.

Error 6 Cross conveyor 1 An open circuit has been detected in the cross conveyor
Output Failure output. This could also be caused by setting a maximum
nulling output value too large.

Error 7 Cross conveyor 2 An open circuit has been detected in the cross conveyor
Output Failure output. This could also be caused by setting a maximum
nulling output value too large.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 235 of 273


34/48

Error Description Explanation


Number

Error 8 No Material Detected The material detect sensor has detected an empty
hopper.

Error 9 No Liquid Detected The liquid pump pressure is too low.

Error 10 No Ground Speed This is caused by an instantaneous loss of ground speed


signal, most likely a cable break.

Error 11 No Conveyor Sensor This is caused by a long term, persistent, loss of conveyor
speed signal, most likely a cable break or sensor
misalignment.

Error 12 No Pre-wet Flow This is caused by a long term, persistent loss of pre-wet
Sensor flow signal, most likely a cable break or sensor
misalignment.

Error 13 No Anti-ice Flow This is caused by a long term, persistent, loss of anti-ice
Sensor flow signal, most likely a cable break or sensor.

3.7.2 Warning Messages


Warning messages are for information purposes only; the controller will not take any
action, and the message will disappear automatically after four seconds. The
following warning messages can occur:

Error Description Explanation


Number
Error 20 Output Non-Zero This is a safety function to prevent the controller from
accidentally sending an unexpected output when the
controller is turned on, or when the user leaves
programming mode and enters normal operation mode.
The outputs will be kept at zero until the error condition
is removed. To recover, set the application rates to zero
or exit Blast mode.

Error 21 Unload Not Allowed An attempt was made to enter Unload mode while the
truck was moving, which is not allowed. The Unload
command will be ignored in this case.

Error 22 BB3 System Error This is an unrecoverable error in the RC controller. Try
rebooting the controller to see if it goes away, otherwise
report the failure to Bosch Rexroth. This error can also
occur if an attempt is made to run a joystick without
having an RCE controller present.

Error 23 This is a communication failure between the RC controller


and the display. It will show up in the logging history in
the RC controller after the display is re-connected.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 236 of 273


35/48

Error Description Explanation


Number
Error 24 RCE Communication This is a communication failure between the RC controller
Failure and the RCE controller in a system with a joystick. It will
automatically shut down the joysticks. The status of this
communication can also be monitored using the display
item called DIG which is available by double-tapping on
the gear icon while in normal operation mode. The item
called DIG at the bottom right corner of the display should
normally be zero. It will be E0 if this error occurs.

Error 25 Joystick 1 This will shut down the joystick outputs, and will show up
Communication as a 40 in the live DIG display item.
Failure

Error 26 Joystick 2 This will shut down the joystick outputs, and will show up
Communication as a 80 in the live DIG display item.
Failure

Error 27 No Gate Sensor Gate sensor failure, most likely caused by cable break.
This will force the gate control into Manual.

Error 28 Gate Position is Zero This will occur only if the gate position is zero while in
gate read-back mode. The conveyor will not be allowed to
move until this is fixed.

Error 29 No Ground Speed This is just an information message to indicate that


Simulation ground speed simulation mode has been stopped.

Error 30 Under-Application: The spinner cannot meet the desired RPM setpoint. This
Spinner should not happen in manual mode, but could happen if
the spinner is in PPS mode and the ground speed is high.

Error 31 Under-Application: The conveyor cannot meet the desired RPM setpoint.
Conveyor Caused by too high application rate or too high ground
speed or incorrect calibration.

Error 32 Under-Application: The pre-wet pump cannot meet the desired flow setpoint.
Pre-wet Caused by too high application rate or too high ground
speed or incorrect calibration.

Error 33 Under-Application: The anti-ice pump cannot meet the desired flow setpoint.
Anti-ice Caused by too high application rate or too high ground
speed or incorrect calibration.

Error 34 Over-Application: The solid application rate is above setpoint. Most likely
Conveyor caused by a minimum null value for conveyor output that
is too high, so the conveyor never stops.

Error 35 Over-Application: The pre-wet application rate is above setpoint. Most likely
Pre-wet caused by a minimum null value for the pre-wet pump
output that is too high, so the pump never stops.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 237 of 273


36/48

Error Description Explanation


Number
Error 36 Over-Application: The anti-ice application rate is above setpoint. Most likely
Anti-ice caused by a minimum null value for the anti-ice pump
output that is too high, so the pump never stops.

Error 37 Calibration: Ground- Calculated pulses per km is too low during calibration.
Speed Pulses Too Possibly caused by no sensor feedback, or try
Low recalibrating the ground speed sensor.

Error 38 Spinner Maximum During auto-nulling, the calculated maximum RPM was too
RPM Too Low low, most likely caused by no sensor feedback.

Error 39 Conveyor Maximum During auto-nulling, the calculated maximum RPM was too
RPM Too Low low, most likely caused by no sensor feedback.

Error 40 Pre-wet Maximum Hz During auto-nulling, the calculated maximum Hz was too
Too Low low, most likely caused by no sensor feedback.

Error 41 Anti-ice Maximum Hz During auto-nulling, the calculated maximum Hz was too
Too Low low, most likely caused by no sensor feedback.

Error 42 Wrong Spinner An attempt was made to perform auto-nulling of a spinner


Control Mode while it was in manual.

Error 43 Wrong Spinner Not Used.


Control Mode

Error 44 Wrong Pre-wet An attempt was made to perform auto-nulling, or volume


Control Mode calibration, of a pre-wet pump while it was in manual.

Error 45 Wrong Anti-ice An attempt was made to perform auto-nulling, or volume


Control Mode calibration, of an anti-ice pump while it was in manual.
This error could also be caused by an I/O conflict between
a cross conveyor mode and the anti-ice pump output, in
which case the anti-ice pump will be disabled.

Error 46 Wrong Cross An attempt was made to go into Reverse while this output
conveyor Mode was being used by a cross conveyor mode. The Reverse
command will be ignored in this case. Could also be
caused by attempting to use gm/sq.m. mode while there
was an I/O conflict with a Cross conveyor CA mode, in
this case gm/sq.m. mode will not be allowed. Could also
be caused by attempting to use closed loop gate control
while in Cross conveyor US mode or Liquid-Plus mode, in
which case the gate control will be forced into gate read
back mode.

Error 47 Wt. Per Revolution During conveyor weight calibration, the calculated weight
Too Low per revolution was too low, most likely caused by typing in
zero for the weight.

Error 48 Wt. Per Revolution During conveyor weight calibration, the calculated weight
Too High per revolution was too high, most likely caused by no
conveyor sensor feedback.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 238 of 273


37/48

Error Error Number Description


Number
Error 49 Pre-wet Pulses Per During calibration of pre-wet volume output, the
Gallon Too Low pulses/gal was too low, most likely caused by no flow
sensor feedback.

Error 50 Pre-wet Pulses Per During calibration of pre-wet volume output, the
Gallon Too High pulses/gal was too high, most likely caused by typing in
zero for the volume.

Error 51 Anti-ice Pulses Per During calibration of anti-ice volume output, the
Gallon Too Low pulses/gal was too low, most likely caused by no flow
sensor feedback.

Error 52 Anti-ice Pulses Per During calibration of anti-ice volume output, the
Gallon Too High pulses/gal was too high, most likely caused by typing in
zero for the volume.

Error 53 Spinner mm at Zero During calibration of the relationship between spinner


RPM Too Low RPM and spinner spread width, a value of 0 mm at zero
RPM was used.

Error 54 Spinner mm Per RPM During calibration of the relationship between spinner
Too Low RPM and spinner spread width, a value of maximum
spread width was used that was less than the mm at zero
RPM.

Error 55 Gate Movement Too During calibration of gate maximum and minimum
Low position, the difference between minimum and maximum
height was less than 1 inch.

Error 56 Gate Zero in Manual While in manual gate control mode, the operating gate
position was specified to be zero.

Error 57 Gate at Calibration While calibrating the weight per revolution for a specific
Too Low material, the gate position at calibration was specified to
be zero.

Error 58 Spinner PPR Too Low A value of zero was used for spinner pulses per revolution.

Error 59 Conveyor PPR Too A value of zero was used for conveyor pulses per
Low revolution.

Error 60 Spinner Output The difference between maximum and minimum spinner
Range Too Low nulling values was less than 5%.

Error 61 Conveyor Output The difference between maximum and minimum conveyor
Range Too Low nulling values was less than 5%.

Error 62 Cross Conveyor 1 The difference between maximum and minimum cross
Output Range Too conveyor nulling values was less than 5%.
Low

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 239 of 273


38/48

Error Description Explanation


Number
Error 63 Cross Conveyor 2 The difference between maximum and minimum cross
Output Range Too conveyor nulling values was less than 5%.
Low

Error 64 Pre-wet Outrange The difference between maximum and minimum pre-wet
Range Too Low nulling values was less than 5%.

Error 65 Anti-ice Output Range The difference between maximum and minimum anti-ice
Too Low nulling values was less than 5%.

Error 66 Joystick 1 Output The difference between maximum and minimum joystick
Range Too Low nulling values for one of the six outputs was less than 5%.

Error 67 Joystick 2 Output The difference between maximum and minimum joystick
Range Too Low nulling values for one of the six outputs was less than 5%.

Error 68 Theoretical Maximum Based on the specified application rate setpoints, and the
Conveyor RPM Too maximum ground speed, the maximum theoretical
High conveyor RPM required has been calculated to be more
than twice the actual conveyor capacity, which will lead to
serious under-application problems. The actual controller
RPM setpoint will be clamped at this value to prevent the
controller from becoming unstable, and the conveyor
should be re-calibrated to determine the source of the
problem.

Error 69 Theoretical Maximum Based on the specified application rate setpoints, and the
Pre-wet Hz Too High maximum ground speed, the maximum theoretical pre-wet
pump flow required has been calculated to be more than
twice the actual pump capacity, which will lead to serious
under-application problems. The actual pump flow
setpoint will be clamped at this value to prevent the
controller from becoming unstable, and the pre-wet pump
should be re-calibrated to determine the source of the
problem.

Error 70 Theoretical Maximum Based on the specified application rate setpoints, and the
Anti-ice Hz Too High maximum ground speed, the maximum theoretical anti-ice
pump flow required has been calculated to be more than
twice the actual pump capacity, which will lead to serious
under-application problems. The actual pump flow
setpoint will be clamped at this value to prevent the
controller from becoming unstable, and the anti-ice pump
should be re-calibrated to determine the source of the
problem.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 240 of 273


39/48

4 Logging Reports
Clicking on the icon to the left will bring up the Logging Report dialog shown below.

This allows for selection of logging data involving multiple trucks. The logging
reports can be either Crystal Reports, or Excel reports, or a graphical pie chart
report; the default is Crystal Reports. Clicking on ‘View Report’ will produce a
Crystal Report in a multi-page format that is suitable for either printing or exporting
to a file, similar to the Truck Parameter Report. Clicking on ‘Email Report’ will email
the same report as an attachment, and the person who receives it will need to
rename the attachment from ‘untitled.txt’ to ‘something.rtf’ in order to view it as a
Rich Text Format file.

When selecting data, if nothing is selected in a specific category (such as ‘Truck’, for
example), then all the items in that category will be used. Any selection can be
toggled on or off by holding down the Ctrl key while clicking on an item. The
number of records currently selected will be displayed at the top in the title of the
dialog box. Due to space limitations, the liquid data will be displayed in one of three
formats: pre-wet only (letter size), anti-ice only (letter size), or both (legal size).
Clicking on the option ‘Only Spreading Events’ will produce a report in which
calibration events, unload events and zero application rate have been removed. The
reports can be grouped by date and by driver, if desired.

If desired, logging data can be selectively deleted using this dialog screen. Due to
the fact that different printers may use different alignment at the edges, there is an
option to adjust the margins, in case a letter is missing at the left or right edge.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 241 of 273


40/48

5 GPS Data Reports


Clicking on the icon shown to the left will bring up the GPS Trip Report dialog
shown below.

This allows for selection of GPS data, similar to the logging data selection
procedure. The GPS data will be displayed using Google Earth. Click on ‘Drive GPS
Route’ to display the entire route as a blue/green line (blue for non-spreading
events, green for spreading events). The waypoints on the route will be displayed as
balloons. The balloon style can be chosen to represent either the solids’ application
rate or the status of the digital inputs. If ‘Rate’ is chosen, then for a spreading event
the balloon will be green with either a ‘B’ for Blast or a number from ‘1’ to ‘9’
indicating the application rate. For a non-spreading event the balloon will be blue
with either a ‘P’ for Pause or a ‘0’ for zero application rate. If ‘Digital’ is chosen,
then the balloon will represent the status of six possible digital inputs. Clicking on a
balloon will bring up a snapshot of the truck status at that point. The fields to
display in this status report can be chosen by clicking on ‘Choose GPS Fields’. When
choosing fields, use the Ctrl key to allow a specific field to be selected or de-
selected without affecting any of the other fields.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 242 of 273


41/48

Not all of the data points will be displayed as balloons when the map first loads. The
number of balloons that are displayed is controlled by the Google slider at the top
left.

Only the points that are between the Start time marker and the End time marker
will be displayed. These markers can be dragged to focus on a specific time. You
can dynamically drive the entire route by dragging the end time marker from start to
finish. You can also automatically drive the route by clicking on the ‘Drive’ button.

There are various types of additional information that can be overlaid onto the map.
In particular, the option to display road names is useful; this can be selected as
shown below.

When using Google Earth, the data is stored in an intermediate file called
‘google.kml’ in the same directory as this program. This file can be double-clicked at
any time to view it in Google Earth independently of this program, or it can be
emailed to others. An alternative view of the data, outside of Google Earth, is
obtained by clicking on ‘Scroll through GPS Data’. This will show a numerical table
of the data. This table can be copied and pasted into Excel by selecting some rows
and using Ctrl-C and Ctrl-V. If desired, GPS data can be selectively deleted using
this dialog screen.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 243 of 273


42/48

6 CS-550 WiFi Data Transfer


6.1 Initial WiFi Set-up
As an alternative to the use of a USB stick to transfer data from the CS-550, it is
also possible to use a WiFi connection. The presence of a WiFi connection can be
confirmed as follows. On the Windows taskbar on the CS-550 display, double-click
on the network icon to produce display shown below.

The title should say ‘GSPI86861’. The tab called ‘Wireless Information’ should
contain a connection called ‘CS-WDTS’ and the status should say ‘Connected’.
The next piece of information that is needed is the display’s IP address. You will
need this later when setting up the WiFi data transfer program. This is shown in the
‘IP Information’ tab. You will need this later when setting up the WiFi data transfer
program.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 244 of 273


43/48

On the computer, you can confirm the WiFi connection by double-clicking on the
WiFi network icon on the taskbar to produce the display shown below.

This should also show that the connection CS-WDTS is present and that the status
is ‘connected’. If you are not able to locate the WiFi connection icon on the taskbar,
then it may be that the adapter is not running. In this case, an independent check of
the WiFi status can be obtained by clicking on the ‘Network’ icon in the CS-550WiFi
program, described below.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 245 of 273


44/48

This will run the DOS command ‘ipconfig/all’. If the WiFi adapter is running, then
you should get a response like what is shown below.

Ethernet adapter Wireless Network Connection:


Connection-specific DNS Suffix : wel.us.bosch.com
Description : Intel(R) WiFi Link 5100 BG
Physical Address : 00-26-C6-55-7C-F0
Dhcp Enabled : Yes
Autoconfiguration Enabled : No
IP Address : 192.168.1.109

This will also give you the IP address of the computer, which you normally will not
need. If the WiFi adapter is not running, you may see a response that looks like what
is shown below.

Ethernet adapter Wireless Network Connection:


Media State : Media discontinued

Finally, if all of the above tests are passed, and if you are still not able to
communicate using the CS-550WiFi program described below, you can
independently confirm that the connection is present using the DOS command
‘ping’. The presence of the computer’s wireless adapter can be confirmed using the
same IP address shown above, and the response in DOS should look like this:

C:\Documents and Settings\username>ping 192.168.1.109


Pinging 192.168.1.109 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 192.168.1.109: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=128

The presence of the CS-550 display can also be confirmed using the IP address from
the display, and the response should look like this:

C:\Documents and Settings\username>ping 192.168.1.107


Pinging 192.168.1.107 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 192.168.1.107: bytes=32 time=24ms TTL=128

If either of these tests fails, then you will get a response like this:

Pinging 192.168.1.106 with 32 bytes of data: Request timed out.

6.2 WiFi Data Transfer


The WiFi data transfer system is designed to constantly monitor for the presence of
new trucks and to upload the data from them automatically using a program called

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 246 of 273


45/48

CS-550WiFi.exe. This program does not need to be installed separately, it just needs
to be copied from the CD to the same directory as the program CS-550Desktop.exe.
This will normally be the directory C:\Program Files\CS-550Desktop\. After copying
it, you may wish to create a shortcut on the desktop by performing a right mouse
button click on it, and selecting the option ‘Send To->Desktop (create shortcut)’.
This shortcut should will look like the icon to the left.

The first time you run the program you will get the message shown below.

Follow by the message shown below.

As indicated, the program is designed to run in the background, minimized on the


taskbar. The first thing that needs to be done is to add some IP addresses. Click on
the ‘Add’ button and then click on the IPAddress field in the first line, where it says
‘---.---.---.---’. Type in the CS-550 display address obtained in Section 6.1 above, for
example 192.168.1.107. Then click on the ‘Use’ field to enable the checkbox, and
then click on ‘Run’ which will start the monitoring activity. If the connection with
the truck is established, then the checkbox called ‘Connected’ will receive a check
mark, and the program should appear as below.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 247 of 273


46/48

In the case of a successful connection, the Region Name, and Truck ID, and
Parameter Date will show the last successful transfer of parameter data for this
truck, and the Log Date field will show the date of the last successful transfer of log
data.

The general purpose of this dialog is to allow configuration of different IP addresses


that you wish to monitor. This will be described below. When the configuration is
complete, click on the ‘Done’ button. This will minimize the icon for the program so
that it appears on the taskbar at the bottom right corner of the screen, as shown
below.

The program will now run continuously in the background, checking to see if new
trucks have arrived. If you wish to stop it completely, perform a right mouse button
click on the icon on the taskbar, and select ‘Exit’. In the same menu that shows
‘Exit’, you can also choose ‘Configure’, which will return you to the above dialog,
which allows you to either configure the IP addresses or check the status of the
communication.

During the ‘Configure’ step, you can add and delete IP addresses, and enable or
disable the monitoring of these addresses. First click ‘Stop’ to stop the monitoring
process. To delete an address, click on the appropriate row, so that the cursor in
the left column moves to that row. Then click the ‘Delete’ button. You will get a
warning message asking you to confirm this deletion. If you select ‘Yes’ then this
truck will disappear. Note that this does not delete any of the data that had
previously been received from this truck. It simply means that this truck will no
longer be monitored in the future. You may need to do this, for example, if a truck’s
IP address changed because the CS-550 display was changed. To add a new truck
to the list, click on ‘Add’ and create a new IP address as done above. When finished,
then click on ‘Run’ to start monitoring. If you want this IP address to be used
immediately, then click on ‘Use’ before clicking on ‘Run’. If a syntax error was made

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 248 of 273


47/48

in typing the IP address, for example not enough ‘.’, or some illegal characters, then
the IP address may be cleared, in which case you will need to stop the monitor,
click on that row, and delete the address, which will be blank at this point. Note
that only two fields can be changed by the user, namely the IP address field when
you are adding a new address, and the ‘Use’ field which enables monitoring. All the
other fields contain data that will be read from the truck and cannot be modified.

It is not necessary that all the trucks be monitored all the time. If you have trucks
that are temporarily not in use, you can temporarily avoid monitoring them by
clicking on ‘Stop’, then uncheck the ‘Use’ column, and then click on ‘Run’. Only
those trucks that have a check mark in the ‘Use’ column will be monitored for
activity. Most of the fields in this table represent historical data, meaning that they
show information only on the last successful connection. The one field that shows
‘live’ data is the ‘Connected’ field. This field will automatically show a check mark
when a new truck arrives, and the check mark will automatically disappear when the
truck leaves or is turned off. The actual data transfer from the truck occurs only
when the connection is first established. No further data transfer from this truck will
be attempted until the truck first leaves and then reappears.

Once the configuration of IP addresses is complete, if you do not wish the dialog
box to be present, you can click on ‘Done’. The program will continue monitoring,
until you close it by clicking on the taskbar and selecting ‘Exit’. When you restart the
program it will automatically go into monitoring mode, as though you had pressed
the ‘Run’ button. The title bar of the ‘Configure’ dialog box will indicate whether the
program is ‘Running’ or ‘Stopped’.

There are three other icons in the dialog box, entitled ‘Help’, ‘IP Config’, and ‘Log
file’. The ‘Help’ button shows the software version number and the initial startup
message. The ‘IP Config’ button shows information on the wireless adapter card, for
diagnostic purposes. The ‘Log file’ button displays a text file called CS-550WiFi.log.
This is a history of recent IP addresses which have been used, and it indicates how
much data was read from each truck. It also reports any error messages that
occurred, which may be useful for diagnostic purposes. The size of this file has been
limited to 25K, which will be roughly 500 messages.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 249 of 273


48/48

Notes:

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 04.12.2012 ı Revision 1.4

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 250 of 273


CS 550/150RC
Spreader Joystick Controller Installation Manual

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 251 of 273


2/18

Table of Contents
1 System Components 3
2 Spreader System Layout 4
3 Joystick System Layout 5
4 Mounting 7
4.1 Microcontroller 7
4.2 Display and Joystick 8
5 Dimensions 9
5.1 Display 9
5.2 Joystick 9
6 Connector Details 10
6.1 Microcontroller Connection 10
6.2 Solenoid Connection 10
7 Cable Connections 11
7.1 Cable Connections 11
7.2 Main Harness Connections 12
8 Cable Function Chart 13
9 Installation Notes 15
9.1 Step 1 15
9.2 Step 2 15
10 Installation Test Checklist 17
11 Warning
Warnin g 18
12 Appendix – Detailed CS550/150 System Layout

Bosch Rexroth Canada Corp. reserves the right to revise this information at any time and for
any reason and reserves the right to make changes at any time, without notice or obligation,
to any of the information contained in this piece of literature.
Please check for updates at: www.boschrexroth.ca/compu-spread

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 01.28.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 252 of 273


3/18

1 System Components

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 01.28.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 253 of 273


4/18

2 Spreader System Layout

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 01.28.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 254 of 273


5/18

3 Joystick System Layout

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 01.28.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 255 of 273


6/18

The following is a detailed navigation chart for the system layout. See Appendix for
the detailed CS550/150 system layout including all the components and part
numbers.

CS-550 / 150 ELECTRONIC SYSTEM BUILDER


TABLE OF CONTENTS
COORDINATES
ITEM DESCRIPTION X.Y DETAILS

550 SPREADER

1 SPREADER PACKAGES E1 DISPLAY AND RC INCLUDED


2 MAIN HARNESS D7 ADVANCED OR LITE
3 CANBUS CABLES C2
4 SENSOR EXTENSIONS B6
5 SENSOR NETWORK C6 PULL-UP RESISTOR (WHITE MOTOR)
6 VEHICLE SPEED B7
7 VALVE EXTENSIONS E6 IF RC LOCATED IN CAB
8 550 AUXILIARY CABLE E3 MATERIAL DETECT / CHANGE
9 VALVE ADAPTER E6 (C4M TO ITT) FOR OLD SCB/MP18

150 ARMREST

1 RCE CABLES A3 IN-VALVE OR IN-CAB


2 POWER FLOAT C4 NO ADAPTERS FOR NEW C4 BLOCK
3 150 AUXILIARY B2
4 CANBUS CABLE C2
5 LOW OIL, SPIN. REV. C3 ADAPTERS REQUIRED

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

1 PRESSURE/TEMP/CHUTE D3 HYDRAULIC MONITORING


2 ROAD TEMP D0 ROAD AND AMBIENT TEMP
3 WIFI D2 NEED EXTENSION?
4 GPS PUCK E0
5 ANTI-ICE E4 USE C4-C4 EXTENSIONS (CUT END)

TOW PLOW

1 TP SPREADER PKG E1 INCLUDES TWO 4-4's


2 MAIN HARNESS D9
3 CANBUS SPLITTER D6
4 SENSOR EXTENSIONS B6 RC ON TRUCK OR TRAILER?
5 SENSOR NETWORK C6 IF PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED
6 VALVE EXTENSIONS E6 RC ON TRUCK OR TRAILER?

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 01.28.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 256 of 273


7/18

4 Mounting
4.1 Microcontroller
1. The microcontrollers(s) can be mounted horizontal or with the connectors
oriented to the bottom. The controller cannot be mounted with the connectors
facing upwards.
2. The mounting surface must be flat and all four bracket holes used.
3. Sufficient space must be allowed for the mating and un-mating of the
connectors.
4. If the controller is mounted in the cab, valve extension cables are required to be
routed into the valve enclosure.
5. If the controller is mounted in the valve enclosure, the main harness leads will
terminate directly to the valve solenoid.
6. The mount hole spacing is 188mm (7.4”) by 59mm (2.32”).
7. See the “Installation Notes” for additional recommendations (page 15).

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 01.28.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 257 of 273


8/18

4.2 Display and Joystick


1. The display utilizes a ball mount where 4 holes of the flange must be secured.
(See hole array.)
2. Similar ball mounts are used when the display is coupled to the armrest – one
long arm and one short.
3. The joystick armrest console utilizes a tube mount that slips over 1-7/8” O/D
pedestal tubing.
4. The tube mount can slide forward and back 1.7” to optimize the armrest
position. (Loosen the ¼-20 nuts.)
5. The ratchet clamp can be used to lock the rotation of the tube and bracket.
6. See the “Installation Notes” for additional recommendations (page 15).

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 01.28.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 258 of 273


9/18

5 Dimensions
5.1 Display

5.2 Joystick

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 01.28.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 259 of 273


10/18

6 Connector Details
6.1 Microcontroller Connection
1. Extend sliding tabs.
2. Partially insert connector into socket and ensure the 4 coding posts align into
housing.
3. Push sliding tabs in and the connector will fully insert and lock itself.
4. To remove, pull the tabs out and the connector will un-mate.

Note: The RC4-4 “Spreader” controller uses only the larger connector, while the
RCE “Joystick” controller uses both.

6.2 Solenoid Connection


1. Push on the connector to mate.

2. Press metal retainer to un-mate.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 01.28.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 260 of 273


11/18

7 Cable Connections
7.1 Cable Connections
Connect the CANBUS EXTENSION from CAN1 to the CANBUS lead on the main
harness or to the FEMALE CONNECTOR on the armrest (if equipped).

Connect the MALE CONNECTOR to CAN2 of the RCE harness.

If switches are present: Connect the power harness to the ignition, disconnect then
to the 2 PIN CONNECTOR.

• P3 interconnects with the 16 PIN ARMREST CONNECTOR. Connect the power


harness to battery or ignition disconnect.
• P5 is for the AUXILIARY CABLE with bare leads. (See OSD for pinouts.)

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 01.28.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 261 of 273


12/18

7.2 Main Harness Connections


All 2 POSITION MOLDED CONNECTORS with diagnostic LEDs are for solenoids. Each
leg has a function label.

Note: Valve extensions are required if the microcontroller is mounted in the cab (see
page 7, note 4, 5).

• All 5 POSITION THREAD-


HREAD-ON connectors are for sensors.
• The 8 POSITION
POSITION THREAD-
THREAD-ON connectors are for CANBUS and auxiliary digital
inputs. (See layouts on pages 4 to 6.)
• See system layout for Auxiliary Cable ad Remote Pause/Blast.
• See installation notes for routing details (page 15).
• See function chart for connection details (page 13, 14).

NOTE: INLINE SENSOR NETWORK(PN:R987376742) NEEDS


TO BE INSTALLED FOR SENSORS LIKE WHITE MOTOR
REQUIRED A PULL-UP RESISTOR.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 01.28.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 262 of 273


13/18

8 Cable Function Chart


Standard CS550 Cable Harness (PN: R987376368)

Cable Label Primary Function Secondary Function

S5 SPINNER Spinner Feed Prewet(Spn Rvs)

S4 CONV. Conveyor/Auger Feed

S12 ANTI-ICE Anti-ice Feed, Boom Left Cross CONV(Cross Cnv, Metric)

S11 LIQUID Pre-wet Feed Spinner Fwd(Spn Rvs)


Boom Left (3Boom Anti-icing)

G1 GATE RAISE Gate Raise Feed Cross CONV1(Cross Cnv, Imperial)


Boom Left(Liquid+)

G2 GATE LOWER Gate Lower Feed Cross CONV2(US)


Boom Right(Liquid+)

GS 12V 12V Output W/GS Chute Left(Pattern)


Cross Cnv Dig(Cross Cnv, Metric)
Air Gate(Air Gate)
Boom Centre(3 Boom Anti-icing)

REVERSE Auger Reverse Feed Boom Right(3 Boom Anti-icing)


Chute Right(Pattern)
Cross Dig(Cross Cnv, Metric)

S3 GSS Ground Speed Input

S6 CSS Conveyor Speed feedback

S9 LSS Pre-wet Flow Feedback Spinner Motor Speed (Wt/Area)

S10 GATE SS Gate Pos Sensor Feedback

S8 SPIN SS Anti-ice Flow Feedback

AUX SS Temp &Pressure Inputs Chute Position Input (Pattern)

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 01.28.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 263 of 273


14/18

Standard CS550Lite Cable Harness (PN: R9873763


R987376367)
67)

Cable Label Primary Function Secondary Function

S5 SPINNER Spinner Feed Prewet(Spn Rvs)


Boom Left( 3 Boom Anti-icing)

S4 CONV. Conveyor/Auger Feed Boom Right(3 Boom Anti-icing)

S11 LIQUID Pre-wet Feed Spinner Fwd(Spn Rvs)


Boom Centre( 3 Boom Anti-icing)

S7 REVERSE Anti-icing/Auger Reverse Option selectable, one function only


/GS12/Air Gate

S3 GSS Ground Speed Pulse

S6 CSS Conveyor Speed Feedback

S9 LSS Pre-wet Flow Meter Feedback

S8 SPIN SS Spinner Speed Feedback Anti-ice Flow Feedback

AUX SS Pressure Input

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 01.28.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 264 of 273


15/18

9 Installation Notes
9.1 Step 1
Unpack all the supplied parts and check the packing list for completeness.

9.2 Step 2
Untie and layout all the cables supplied, to ensure proper lengths.

Note: Electromagnetic devices such as relays, magnetic switches and solenoids, can
generate large negative voltage spikes. These large spikes are conducted into the
vehicle’s electrical system and may adversely affect all electronic devices including
engine computers. It is strongly recommended that these electromagnetic devices
be electrically suppressed. See warnings and instructions in Body Builder manuals.

1. Connect the Controller 12V power supply and the ground wire using a
dedicated circuit only. (Connect to the ignition disconnect, if available.
Otherwise, connect directly to the battery.)
2. Ensure wiring for transmission devices such as radios, etc. are not attached to
the controller or bundled with the controller wiring.
3. A sufficiently large distance to radio systems must be maintained.
4. Make sure all mounting posts are properly grounded; a direct ground wire to the
negative battery post is recommended. Floor mats and undercoating will
interfere with proper grounding.
5. Disconnect the battery terminals before welding on a vehicle with electronic
equipment.
6. Disconnect the negative battery terminal when wiring electronic devices.
7. Mount the consoles so that they do not interfere with vehicle controls or
obstruct visibility.
8. Mount microcontrollers so that oil and salt spray do not contact the housing.
9. Route cables so that they will not be abused, damaged or immersed in oil.
10. When routing cables through metal opening, always use grommets to prevent
cable damage.
11. When running wires around a dump box pivot point, ensure no connectors can
be separated when the hoist is activated.
12. Tie cables clear of all moving parts like drive-axles or conveyor chains.
13. Observe the cable labeling (under the clear cover) for the proper termination of
inputs and outputs.
14. Use dielectric grease on all external cable connections and pins to ensure
proper corrosion protection.
15. Thoroughly clean all power and ground terminals before connecting power
harness.
16. Stand clear of any hydraulic functions when first powering up the system

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 01.28.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 265 of 273


16/18

17. DO NOT drill holes in any of the enclosures.


18. DO NOT mount components onto the sides, top or front of the CS-150.
19. DO NOT re-wire any of the consoles or cable harnesses.
20. DO NOT weld on the vehicle without completely disconnecting all electronic
consoles.
21. The cylindrical post on which the CS-150 console rests is the only point that
may be used for mounting purposes as no circuitry or wiring is present inside it.

Failure to follow the recommendations will void your warranty.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 01.28.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 266 of 273


17/18

10 Installation Test Checklist


Work order #: Date:
Part number: Software Version:
Serial number: Signature:
After all controller cables and hydraulics are plumbed – vehicle hopper empty
OK NOTES
Start the vehicle – engage hydraulic pump

Power on display, check for backlight and display operation

Press the “speed” field and hold the “up arrow” for 5 seconds – Release
(Turning on simulated ground speed)
Press the up arrow again to increase speed to 20

Rotate all the dials clockwise to 5 – rate should change

Verify that the conveyor/auger is operating – feedback?

Verify that the spinner is operating

Verify that the liquid pump is operating – feedback?

Verify that the gate cylinder and sensor is operating


(if equipped)
Press the speed down arrow to lower the speed to 0 –
press the speed field to exit
Drive the vehicle to check that vehicle speed registers

Activate the joystick as defined in the OSD test drawing –


verify proper actuation
Test special functions – power float, low oil, emergency raise

Test auxiliary switches for proper operation

The above procedure is a simple way to verify system connections,


hydraulics operation, and sensor feedback.
feedback. It may not work for all the
systems. The reliable way to test is to follow the steps
steps in 550
Calibration Manual.

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 01.28.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 267 of 273


18/18

11 Warning
This glass LCD touch screen display has been extensively tested and validated
against its intended use. This glass could crack and break if the display is dropped
on to a hard surface or receives a substantial impact. If the glass chips or cracks,
discontinue use and contact Bosch Rexroth Canada to have it replaced - do not
touch or attempt to remove the broken glass. Any misuse/abuse causing damage,
whether intended or not, will become the sole responsibility of the owner/buyer
which will render the warranty of this product, void.

Notes

Bosch Rexroth Canada ı 01.28.2013 ı Revision 2.0

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 268 of 273


E08626-M & E08791-M Page 269 of 273
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 270 of 273


NOTES:

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 271 of 273


NOTES:

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 272 of 273


E008626 & E008791

Maple Crete

Part 2 of 2

Purchased From Tallman Truck Center


Date October, 2016
Model DLA
Serial Number E008626 & E008791

Record the Model and Serial Number of equipment for parts ordering information

www.vikingcives.com

E08626-M & E08791-M Page 273 of 273

S-ar putea să vă placă și